JP6958598B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with directing members are known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-28226 (for example, FIG. 33)

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is room for improvement regarding the displacement of the effect member.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the effect member can be suitably displaced.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an effect member, a displacement means for displace the effect member between the first position and the second position, and a drive for applying a driving force to the displacement means. are those in which e Bei means, wherein the displacement means comprises a base member, an arm member one end to the base member is displaceably arranged on the other end side front Symbol presentation member rotatably connected is disposed on the base member slide displaceably by rotation about the said one end of the arm member, and a maintaining means for maintaining the posture of the presentation member relative to the base member, said directing member, is slid displaced between the first position and the second position with the sliding displacement of said maintaining means, said maintaining means, to be backlash in the rotation axis direction of the arm body to the base member Ru is disposed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the effect member can be preferably displaced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of the vertical slide unit. It is a rear view of the vertical slide unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the vertical slide unit which looked at the disassembled vertical slide unit from the front. It is the disassembled rear view of the disassembled vertical slide unit with the rear view. (A) is a front view of the displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the displacement member. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member on the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11 (b), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member on the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11 (b). be. It is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member which looked at the disassembled displacement member from the front. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement member which looked at the disassembled displacement member from the back. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the vertical slide unit which looked at the disassembled vertical slide unit from the front. It is the disassembled rear view of the disassembled vertical slide unit with the rear view. It is a front perspective view of a rear base, an intermediate base and a front base. It is a rear perspective view of a rear base, an intermediate base and a front base. (A) is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism in which the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the transmission mechanism in which the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the rear. (A) is a front perspective view of the crank gear and the second rack in the disassembled state, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the crank gear and the second rack in the disassembled state. (A) is a front view of the vertical slide unit in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, and (b) is a front view of the vertical slide unit in a state where the displacement member is arranged between the ascending position and the descending position. It is a front view, and (c) is a front view of the vertical slide unit in a state where the displacement member is arranged in a descending position. FIG. 15 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base in the state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 22. It is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base in the state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 23. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the second rack and the second pinion. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit. It is the disassembled rear perspective view of the other side member which looked at the disassembled other side member from the back. It is a front view of the annulus forming unit. It is a rear view of the annulus forming unit. It is a front view of the other side ring unit. It is a rear view of the other side ring unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the other side ring unit which looked at the disassembled other side ring unit from the front. It is the disassembled rear perspective view of the other side ring unit which looked at the disassembled other side ring unit from the back. It is a front perspective view of the back base. (A) is a front view of the drive mechanism in a state where the posture of arranging the ring-divided body in the retracted position is formed, and (b) is a posture of arranging the ring-shaped divided body in the ring-forming position. It is a front view of the drive mechanism in the evacuated state. It is a front perspective view of the posture defining member. (A) is a partially enlarged side view of the ring-divided body in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIa of FIG. 29, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the ring-divided body in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIa of FIG. 29. (C) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ring-divided body in the line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. It is an enlarged sectional view. (A) and (b) are front views and rear views of the annulus forming unit in a state where the annulus divided body is arranged in the retracted position, and (a) and (b) are the annulus divided bodies retracted. It is a front view and a rear view of the ring formation unit in the state which is arranged between the position and the ring formation position, and (a) and (b) are the state which the ring division body is arranged at the ring formation position. It is a front view and the rear view of the ring formation unit in. (A) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring-forming unit in a state where the ring-splitting body is arranged between the retracted position and the ring-forming position. (A) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring-forming unit in a state where the ring-splitting body is arranged at the ring-forming position. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member in the second embodiment, and (c) and (d) are partially enlarged sectional views of the displacement member in a state where the relative displacement by the ball joint mechanism is formed. It is a cross-sectional view. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member in the third embodiment, and (c) and (d) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member in a state where the rubber-like elastic body is elastically deformed. It is a figure. (A) is a rear view of the displacement member in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member in the XLIVb-XLIVb line of (a). (A) is a rear view of the displacement member in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a), and FIG. 45 (c) is a view. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the displacement member in line 45 (a) XLVc-XLVc. (A) and (b) are front views of the displacement member in the sixth embodiment. It is a front view of the vertical slide unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the vertical slide unit. It is a front view of the vertical slide unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the vertical slide unit. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a rear base. FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member in the tenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of the other side member. It is a rear view of the vertical slide unit in eleventh embodiment. It is a rear view of the vertical slide unit in the twelfth embodiment. It is a rear view of the vertical slide unit. (A) is a perspective view of the rear view of the other side member according to the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are a schematic rear view of the other side member schematically showing the mode of changing the posture of the urging spring. It is a figure. (A) is a rear view of the vertical slide unit according to the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base in 15th Embodiment. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back surface base in 16th Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a rear base. (A) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body in the 17th embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body in the 7th embodiment, and (c) is a view. 63 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the annular split body on the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line, and (d) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the annular split body on the LXIIId-LXIIId line of FIG. 63 (b). It is a front view of the vertical slide unit and the ring formation unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional rear view of a vertical slide unit and an annulus formation unit. It is a front view of the vertical slide unit and the ring formation unit in 19th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back surface base in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back surface base in line LXVIIb-LXVIIb of FIG. 67 (a). (A) is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back base in line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of the second rack and the crank gear. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of the second rack and the crank gear. (A) is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back surface base in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back surface base in the line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71 (a). (A) is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back base in the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of gears and crank gears. (A) is a rear view of the one-side member in the 22nd embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the one-side member in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 74 (a). It is a front view of the vertical slide unit in 23rd Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the vertical slide unit and the back case in 24th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the vertical slide unit in the direction of arrow LXXVIIa in FIG. 76, and FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical slide unit in the LXXVIc-LXXVIc line of FIG. 77 (a). It is a front view of the vertical slide unit and the ring formation unit in 25th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit and the ring formation unit in the 26th embodiment. (A) to (c) are rear views of an annular split body, a posture defining member, and a fixing mechanism.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than during normal times. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric motors are applied once. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing with the variable display of the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the protrusion operation unit 400 and the composite operation unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 project into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said that. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the tip portion of the relative displacement member 450 is made visible through the opening of the center frame 86. When placed in the overhang position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. , The left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 when the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and the upper and lower slide units 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are sequentially superposed in the internal space of the back case 210. It is stored in a laminated state, and the decorative cover 500 is laid on the front surface.

The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (left front side of FIG. 6) is opened by each of these wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The vertical slide unit 300 includes a long displacement member 310, and one side member 320L and another side member 320R which are arranged at predetermined intervals and support one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 so as to be guideable. And the intermediate member 370 interposed between the lower ends of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, and the one-side member 320L, the other-side member 320R, and the intermediate member 370 are the rear case 210. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211, respectively. The displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R) while maintaining a posture parallel to the interposition member 370.

The annulus forming unit 400 is composed of a one-sided annulus unit 410L and an other-side annulus unit 410R, and these one-sided annulus unit 410L and the other-side annulus unit 410R are one side member 320L and the other of the upper and lower slide unit 300. It is arranged on the front side (front side) side of the side member 320R, respectively. A pair of upper and lower ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are displaceably arranged in each of the ring units 410L and 410R. The annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are formed by dividing the annular shape into four in the circumferential direction, and when each of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 is displaced to the central position, the divided surfaces come into contact with each other. And an annular shape is formed (see FIG. 41).

The decorative cover 500 is attached to the upright end surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and is arranged on the front (front) side of the ring forming unit 400. That is, the decorative cover 500 is partially covered only along the portion along the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210 to shield the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 from the player, while the opening 211a (that is, the first 3 The symbol display device 81) is visibly exposed to the player.

The detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 and the annulus forming unit 400 among the operation units 200 configured in this way will be described below. First, the detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 28.

FIG. 7 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300, and FIG. 8 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 300. Further, FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 with the disassembled vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective of the vertical slide unit 300 with the disassembled vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the rear. It is a figure.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, in the vertical slide unit 300, the first racks 315 are arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 in a posture parallel to each other. The rack 315 is meshed with each of the first pinions 351 arranged on the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, respectively. Further, the displacement member 310 is slidably connected to the guide rod P on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, and in the assembled state, the guide rod P has its axial direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. It is arranged (fixed) on the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R in a posture aligned with the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, in the vertical slide unit 300, when the first pinion 351 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 341 and the first rack 315 is linearly moved by the rotation, the displacement member 310 is guided by the linear motion. While being guided by the rod P, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R are displaced along the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 21). Here, the detailed configuration of the displacement member 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14.

11 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 310, and FIG. 11 (b) is a rear view of the displacement member 310. 12 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 310 on the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11 (b), and FIG. 12 (b) is the displacement member 310 on the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11 (b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of. Further, FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member 310 with the disassembled displacement member 310 viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement member 310 with the disassembled displacement member 310 viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the displacement member 310 has a main body portion 311 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a cylinder projecting toward the front at the center of the main body portion 311 in the longitudinal direction. A rotary base 312 having a shape, a circular rotating body 313 that is rotatable and concentrically supported by the rotary base 312, and an end side that is displaceably connected to one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311. It mainly includes a portion 314 and a first rack 315 that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the end side portion 314 thereof.

A pair of upper and lower projecting pins 311a project from the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311. The projecting pin 311a is a portion for displaceably connecting the end side portion 314 to the main body portion 311 and is formed in a columnar shape having a circular cross section and is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314.

The pair of upper and lower projecting pins 311a are arranged along a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the main body 311 (vertical direction in FIG. 11B), and are arranged in the longitudinal direction with the projecting pins 311a on one side of the main body 311 in the longitudinal direction. The protrusion pin 311a on the other side is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311 (the left-right direction in FIG. 11B).

Further, the main body portion 311 is formed with stopper surfaces 311b on end surfaces (left side surface and right side surface in FIG. 11A) on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The stopper surface 311b is a portion for restricting the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311.

A drive motor and a gear mechanism (neither shown) are arranged inside the rotation base 312, and the rotation driving force of the drive motor is transmitted to the rotating body 313 by the gear mechanism to rotate the rotating body 313. It is rotated relative to the base 312 (main body 311). The rotation base 312 is fixed to the main body 311. Therefore, as will be described later, by holding the rotation base 312 by another member, the displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be regulated (see, for example, FIG. 65).

An elongated hole 314a, a stopper surface 314b, and a slider holding portion 314c are formed in the end side portion 314. The elongated holes 314a are a pair of upper and lower through holes for receiving the protruding pins 311a of the main body portion 311 and are formed as holes having an oval shape in the front view. The elongated hole 314a is in a direction orthogonal to the major axis direction of the oval shape in the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310, and the one-side member 320L. It is formed in a posture along the direction of connecting the other side member 320R and the left-right direction of FIG. 11B).

In this case, between the projecting pin 311a of the main body 311 and the elongated hole 314a of the end side 314, a cylindrical cylinder and a flange protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder. A color C composed of a portion is provided. In the collar C, the inner diameter of the tubular portion is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311, and the outer diameter of the tubular portion is equal to or slightly larger than the minor diameter in the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314. The outer diameter of the flange portion is set to be slightly smaller than the major diameter of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 12).

As a result, as will be described later, the projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311 passes through the collar C in the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 in the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a (left-right direction in FIG. 12A). It is possible to displace along. That is, the main body portion 311 can be displaced relative to the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 27). By interposing the collar C in this way, the collar C rolls between the projecting pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a, so that the relative displacement can be smoothly performed and wear is suppressed. Therefore, the durability can be improved.

The stopper surface 314b is a portion for regulating the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a specified range, is formed as a flat surface, and is in an assembled state (main body portion 311 and end side). In the state where the portions 314 are connected), the portions 314 are formed at positions facing the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 at a predetermined interval.

The stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 are in the case where each of the protruding pins 311a of the main body portion 311 is located at the center in the major axis direction in each elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (that is, FIG. As shown in 11 (a), the main body portion 311 faces the left and right end side portions 314 in a parallel posture without being tilted).

Further, while maintaining this parallel posture, each projecting pin 311a (color C) is the end of one side in the major axis direction (left side in FIG. 11 (a)) in each slot 314a or the other side in the major axis direction (FIG. 11 (a)). ) When displaced to the end of), the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b face each other with a predetermined interval on both the longitudinal direction side and the other side of the main body 311 (between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b). A gap is formed in).

A rack portion 315a and a slider holding portion 315c are formed on the first rack 315. The rack portion 315a is formed as a rack with gears cut on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member, and is a portion to be meshed with the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 9) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In the assembled state, the tooth surface is arranged so as to be parallel to the axis of the guide rod P.

The slider holding portion 315c is a portion for holding the slider S between the slider holding portion 314c and the end side portion 314. The slider holding portion 314c of the end side portion 314 and the slider holding portion 314c of the first rack 315 are each formed into a shape in which the cylinder is vertically divided into two, and the first rack is fastened and fixed to the end side portion 314. The slider S is held between the facing surfaces (between the inner peripheral surfaces of the cylinder).

The slider S is a cylindrical member that is fitted onto the guide rod P and slides along the axial direction of the guide rod P, and its outer diameter corresponds to the inner diameter of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. Set. A pair of upper and lower locking walls project inward from the inner peripheral surfaces of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c, and in the assembled state, the pair of upper and lower locking walls are on the axial end faces of the slider S. It comes into contact with the slider S to prevent it from coming off in the axial direction.

In this way, by adopting a structure in which the slider S is interposed between the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 and the guide rod P, the slider S is slidable with respect to the brass guide rod P. While it can be formed from a material having excellent wear resistance, the material of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be set independently of the brass guide rod P. That is, since the end side portion 314 is a member that regulates the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 by the stopper surface 314c, it is effective to be able to select a material that can secure the rigidity at the time of the regulation. On the other hand, since the first rack 315 is a member that is meshed with the first pinion 351 and linearly moves by receiving the rotational driving force, it is effective to be able to select a material that can secure the rigidity for maintaining the meshed state. It becomes.

It will be described by returning from FIG. 7 to FIG. As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 by rotating the first pinion 351 arranged on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively. Each of the first racks 315 to be provided is linearly moved, whereby the displacement member 310 is guided along the guide rods P fixed to the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, respectively, and is slidably displaced in the vertical direction. Will be done. Here, the detailed configurations of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 with the disassembled vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 with the disassembled vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the rear. be.

The one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R have a slight difference in shape, but the portion that exerts a technical function is bilaterally symmetric (plane symmetry with respect to a virtual plane located at the center between facing each other). ), And the configuration thereof is substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, the other side member 320R will be described as a representative example, and the description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the other side member 320R includes a rear base 331, an intermediate base 332 that is overlaid on the front (front) side of the back base 331, and the front (front) of the intermediate base 332. A front base 333 that is laid down on the side, a drive motor 341 that is attached to the intermediate base 332, a first pinion 351 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 334, and a drive motor 334 to the first pinion 351. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the above. Here, the detailed configurations of the back base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the rear base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the rear base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the back base 331 has a substantially L-shape in front view from a vertically long main body portion and a protruding portion protruding laterally from the lower end of the main body portion. A transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 15 and 16) formed and for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 341 to the first pinion is accommodated between the intermediate base member 332 and the intermediate base member 332.

The pinion shaft 331a and the rack shaft 331b project from the front surface of the main body portion (the surface facing the intermediate base 332) of the rear base 331, and the first opening 331c and the second opening are formed in the main body portion and the overhanging portion. Each 331d opening is formed.

The pinion shaft 331a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 19), and the rack shaft 331b is a guide groove 364a (see FIG. 19) of the second rack 364. It is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for regulating the posture of the second rack 364. A screw is fastened to the end face of the pinion shaft 331a, and the head of the screw is used to prevent the first pinion 351 from coming off. Further, the diameter of the rack shaft 331b is set to a dimension equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 can rotate about the rack shaft 331b.

Further, the rack shaft 331b is arranged at a position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 in the assembled state of the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332. Specifically, the arrangement position of the rack shaft 331b is set at a position where the direction connecting the axis of the rack shaft 331b and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is orthogonal to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364. .. As a result, as will be described later, the second rack 364 in which the guide groove 364a is guided by the rack shaft 331b can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a pivotally supported by the gear shaft 332i (). See FIG. 26).

The first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are openings that extend linearly, respectively, and are regions corresponding to the urging springs 366 (see FIG. 22) arranged in a bent posture (biased in front view). It is formed in a region that overlaps the spring 366). Therefore, when mounting the urging spring 366, after the urging spring 366 is accommodated between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the urging spring 366 is inserted through the first opening 331c or the second opening 331d. Since the work of locking the end portion to the mating member can be performed, the urging spring 366 can be mounted in a bent posture while being suppressed from being repelled (jumping due to its own elastic recovery force). The mounting work of the urging spring 366 will be described later (see FIG. 28).

Since the urging spring 366 is a coil spring and the outer peripheral surface is curved in an arc shape, the opening widths of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d should be smaller than the diameter of the urging spring 366. Is preferable. This is because it is possible to suppress a decrease in the rigidity of the back surface base 331 while making it possible to suppress the locking of the end portion and the sliding resistance.

The intermediate base 332 is formed in a shape corresponding to the back surface base 331. That is, the intermediate base 332 is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view from the main body portion formed in a vertically long and long shape and the overhanging portion protruding laterally from the lower end of the main body portion, and the intermediate base member 332 is formed. By being laid on the front (front) side, the transmission mechanism is housed in the space formed between the two facing each other.

In the intermediate base 332, a first pinion insertion window 332a and a motor shaft insertion window 332b are formed in the main body portion thereof, and a plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i are formed from the back surface of the main body portion (the surface facing the back base 331). And the roller shaft 332r is projected. The first pinion insertion window 332a is an opening for exposing the first pinion 351 pivotally supported by the pinion shaft 331a of the rear base 331 to the front (front) side of the intermediate base 332, whereby the first pinion The 351 can be meshed with the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 (see FIG. 21).

The motor shaft insertion window 332b connects the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 attached to the front surface (front surface) of the intermediate base 332 to the gear 361 of the transmission mechanism housed between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 facing each other. It is an opening for. Further, the plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the gears 362a to 362e of the transmission mechanism, the crank gear 363, and the transmission gear 365, respectively. A screw is fastened to the end faces of the gear shafts 332c to 332i, and the head of the screw is used to prevent the transmission mechanism gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363, and the transmission gear 365 from coming off.

The roller shaft 332r is a tubular body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the roller 367 (see FIG. 19) of the transmission mechanism. The roller 367 pivotally supported by the roller shaft 332r is held by the facing surfaces of the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 (the facing surfaces are prevented from coming off).

Further, in the intermediate base 332, a pair of left and right regulation walls 332t are projected from the back surface of the main body portion (the surface facing the back base 331), and on the front surface of the main body portion (the surface facing the front base 333). A pair of upper and lower holding recesses 332j and 332k are formed, and a connecting shaft 332m is projected from the front surface of the overhanging portion (the surface facing the front base 333).

The regulation wall 332t is a portion for restricting the posture of the second rack 364, and a pair is formed at a predetermined interval. The facing distance between the pair of regulation walls 332t is larger than the width dimension of the second rack 364, and is formed so as to have a gap between the pair of regulation walls 332t and the side surface of the second rack 364. Therefore, the second rack 364 can be rotated about the rack shaft 331b by the amount of the gap (see FIG. 26).

The holding recesses 332j and 332k are portions for holding the upper end side and the lower end side of the guide rod P, respectively, and are separated in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 17) by a distance equivalent to the length dimension of the guide rod P. As well as being positioned, the front base 333 side is formed as an open recess. The depth and width of the recess are set to dimensions equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the guide rod P. Therefore, by fitting the guide rod P into the holding recesses 332j and 332k and lining (fastening and fixing) the front base 333 to the intermediate base 332, the guide rods are placed between the back surface of the front base 333 and the holding recesses 332j and 332k. The guide rod P can be firmly held by sandwiching P.

As a result, the other side member 320R is assembled with the front base 333 removed, the guide rod P is held by the displacement member 310, and the guide rod P held by the displacement member 310 is fitted into the holding recesses 332j and 332k. By mounting (fastening and fixing) the front base 333, the other side member 320R and the displacement member 310 can be connected. Therefore, the assembling work of the vertical slide unit 300 can be made more efficient.

The connecting shaft 332m is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that serves as a connecting portion with the interposing member 370, and is rotatably inserted into a connecting hole in the connecting plate 371 of the interposing member 370 to be inserted into the other side member 320R. The intermediate member 370 is connected. That is, the other side member 320R and the interposition member 370 are connected in a state where the relative positions can be adjusted. As a result, as will be described later, when the vertical slide unit 300 is attached to the rear case 210, the attachment work can be performed while adjusting the attachment position, so that the workability can be improved.

Next, the detailed configuration of the transmission mechanism and the first pinion 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19A is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism with a front view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state, and FIG. 19B is a rear perspective view of the transmission mechanism with a rear view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in the transmission mechanism, a gear 361 connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and a leading gear (gear 362a) are meshed with the gear 361. The gears 362a to 362e as a gear train, the crank gear 363 meshed with the gear 362e at the tail of the gear train, the second rack 364 driven by the crank mechanism of the crank gear 363, and the second rack 364 thereof. It is formed by including a transmission gear 365 meshed with, an urging spring 366 for applying an urging force to the second rack 364, and a roller 367 for making the urging spring 366 in a bent posture. ..

Here, the detailed configuration of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20A is a front perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state, and FIG. 20B is a rear perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the eccentric pin 363a is projected from the crank gear 363 at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and the eccentric pin 363a is projected on the side where the eccentric pin 363a is projected. The detected portion 363b is projected from the opposite side. The eccentric pin 363a is formed in a columnar shape having a circular cross section, and is inserted into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 in the assembled state. The detected unit 363b is a portion detected by a sensor device (not shown), and the sensor device determines the rotational position (phase) of the crank gear 363 according to the detection / non-detection of the detected unit 363b by the detected unit. ) Is detected. From this detection result, the main control device 110 can be made to recognize that the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position (see FIG. 21A) or the descending position (see FIG. 21C).

A guide groove 364a and a rack groove 364b are formed in the second rack 364. The guide groove 364a is an opening through which the rack shaft 331b (see FIG. 17) of the back base 331 is inserted, and is straight in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack (FIG. 20 (a) and FIG. 20 (b) in the vertical direction). It is extended in a shape.

The rack groove 364b is a concave groove through which the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted, and extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack. The groove width of the rack groove 364b is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the eccentric pin 363a, and the eccentric pin 363a can slide along the rack groove 364b as the crank gear 363 rotates. ..

Since the rack groove 364b extends linearly in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack (that is, the direction orthogonal to the linear motion direction of the second rack 364), the eccentric pin of the crank gear 363 will be described later. It is possible to suppress the generation of components other than the linear motion direction of the second rack 364 in the force component acting on the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 from 363a, and the resistance when the second rack 364 is linearly moved by that amount. Can be suppressed.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b). The transmission gear 365 includes a second pinion 365a meshed with the rack of the second rack 364 and a speed increasing portion 365b meshed with the first pinion 351, and the second pinion 365a and the speed increasing portion 365b It is formed integrally in a concentric state.

The bias spring 366 is a metal coil spring, one end of which is locked to the lower end of the second rack 364 and the other end of which is locked to the end of the overhanging portion of the intermediate base 332. The urging spring 366 is in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed in a state where the second rack 364 is located at the lower end of the movable range, and the elastic recovery force is applied to the second rack 364 as an urging force, and the second rack 364 is subjected to the second rack 364. When the two racks 364 are displaced from the lower end to the upper end of the movable range, the urging force applied to the second rack is gradually increased by further tensile deformation due to the displacement, and the second rack 364 is movable. When the upper end of the range is reached, the most tensilely deformed state is reached, and the maximum urging force is applied to the second rack 364.

As will be described later, the urging spring 366 applies an urging force to the second rack 364 in a direction (inclination direction) that is non-parallel to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364 (see FIGS. 22 to 25). ), By forming the urging spring 366 from the coil spring, it is possible to simplify the structure in which the direction of applying the urging force is not parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364. Further, since the urging force corresponding to the displacement of the second rack 364 can be continuously applied, the second rack 364 can be stably urged.

The roller 367 has a cylindrical cylindrical portion 367a rotatably supported by a roller shaft 332r (see FIG. 18) of the intermediate base 332, and the roller 367 projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a. The flange portion 367b is provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a is brought into contact with one end and the other end of the urging spring 366 to form a bent posture of the urging spring 366.

It will be described by returning from FIG. 7 to FIG. The interposition member 370 is formed in a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front, and is interposed between the lower ends of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R as described above. Specifically, a pair of flat plate-shaped connecting plates 671 are hung from the lower surface (lower side surface of FIG. 7) of the intermediate member 370, and each connecting plate 671 has one connecting hole having a circular front view. By inserting the connecting shaft 332m, which is formed through and protrudes from the overhanging portion of the intermediate base 332, into the connecting hole of the connecting plate 671, the interposing member 370 is interposed between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R. Will be set up.

A screw is fastened to the end face of the connecting shaft 332 m, and the head of the screw is used to prevent the connecting plate 671 from coming off. In this case, the inner diameter of the connecting hole in the connecting plate 671 is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 332 m, and the plate thickness of the connecting plate 671 is slightly smaller than the protrusion height of the connecting shaft 332 m. Is set to. Therefore, the connecting portion between the intermediate member 370, the one-side member 320L, and the other-side member 320R is in a state in which the connecting plate 671 is rotatably supported by the connecting shaft 332m.

As described above, in the vertical slide unit 300, the displacement member 310 is formed so that the displacement member 310 can be displaced along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 7) of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R. That is, the displacement member 310 is formed so that one side (left side in FIG. 7) and the other side (right side in FIG. 7) in the longitudinal direction can be guided to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively, and the driving force of the drive motor 341 is applied. By being imparted, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R are displaced along the longitudinal direction.

Conventionally, in such a unit (that is, a structure in which the displacement member 310 is erected between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R), the rigidity of the unit as a whole is low and it is easy to cause damage. That is, since the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R are easily deformed with respect to the displacement member 310 (for example, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R that should be in a posture parallel to each other in the front view are described as "c." One side member 320L and the other side member 320R, which should be deformed into a "shape" or "inverted C shape", or should be in parallel positions with each other in a side view, are deformed into a "V shape") , The load is concentrated on the connecting portion between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R and the displacement member 310, and the damage is likely to occur. Therefore, for example, in the transport process of transporting such a unit and the mounting process of attaching the unit to the mating member, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R have a "H" shape or a "V" shape with respect to the displacement member 310. It was necessary to handle it so that it would not be deformed, resulting in deterioration of workability.

On the other hand, according to the vertical slide unit 300 in the present embodiment, since the intermediate member 320 interposed between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R is provided, the entire unit is frame-shaped and its rigidity is increased. It can be improved. That is, it is possible to prevent the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R from being deformed into a "H" shape or a "V" shape with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, the handling in the unit state can be facilitated, and the workability in the transport process and the mounting process can be improved.

A brass guide rod P is fixed to each of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, and both ends of the displacement member 310 (slider holding portions of the first rack 315 and the end-side portion 314) are fixed to the guide rods P. Since 314c) is connected, the displacement member 310, the one-side member 320L, and the other-side member 320R can be connected to each other via the guide rod P, whereby the displacement member 310, the one-side member 320L, and the other-side member can be connected. A closed connecting loop can be formed between the 320R and the interposition member 370.

That is, in the conventional product (that is, the form that does not have the guide rod P as compared with the present embodiment), between the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 and the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. The connecting loop is divided, and the displacement member 310, the one-side member 320L, and the other-side member 320R are not connected. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310, the one-side member 320L, and the other-side member 320R can be connected via the guide rod P (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole can be increased. Further, since the guide rod P is fixed to the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, the rigidity of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R is improved by that amount. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole.

In the displacement member 310, the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 (and the first rack 315) are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, so that the guidance by the one-side member 320L and the guidance by the other-side member 320R will be described later. Displacement (that is, the progress of the linear motion of the first rack 315 driven by the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the first pinion 351 of the first pinion 320R of the other side member 320R Even if there is a deviation from the progress of the linear motion of the first rack 315), the deviation is absorbed by the relative displacement, and the displacement member 310 is formed so as to be stably displaced (see FIG. 27). ).

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are connected to the guide rod P via the slider S (that is, in a form surrounding the guide rod P), and the guide rod P is connected to the guide rod P. Since the displacement is regulated in any of the directions perpendicular to the axis (diameter direction), the postures of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 when the displacement member 310 is slidably displaced can be stabilized. As a result, when a deviation occurs between the guidance by the displacement member 310 one side member 320L and the guidance by the other side member 320R, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315. Can be easily generated, and the function of absorbing deviation due to such relative displacement can be surely exhibited.

Here, as described above, the interposition member 370 is inserted into the connecting hole of the connecting plate 371 in a state in which the connecting shaft 332m can rotate, so that the interposition member 370 is inserted into the connecting hole 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively. It is connected in a state where it can be displaced (relative rotation). Therefore, since the relative positions of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R and the interposition member 370 can be adjusted, the workability when attaching the vertical slide unit 300 to the rear case 210 can be improved. For example, even when the one-side member 320L is attached to the predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 and then the other-side member 320R is displaced from the predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210. The position of the other side member 320R can be adjusted with respect to a predetermined position, and as a result, workability can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the displacement member 310, the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are formed so as to be relatively displaceable, and the relative displacement is defined as the lateral direction (longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310) as the major axis direction. Since the elongated hole 314a is used, the form in which the intermediate member 370 and the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R can rotate relative to each other ensures the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole. It is particularly effective in ensuring the function of adjusting the mounting position.

Next, the operation of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. As described above, in the following, the other side member 320R will be described as a representative example, and the description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

21 (a) is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 21 (b) is a view of FIG. 21 (b) in which the displacement member 310 is arranged between the ascending position and the descending position. FIG. 21 (c) is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged in a lowered position. It should be noted that FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) show a state in which the front base 333 is removed in order to make the first pinion 351 and the first rack 315 visible.

FIG. 22 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base 331 in the direction of arrow XXII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 23 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 in the direction of arrow XXIII of FIG. FIG. 24 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 331 in the state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 22, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 in the state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 23. be.

22 and 23 correspond to the state in which the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. 21A is arranged in the ascending position, and in FIGS. 24 and 25, the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. 21C is lowered. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the position. Further, in FIGS. 22 and 24, the illustration of the first pinion 351 is omitted. Further, a state in which the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state in which the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially shown) is shown. However, the addition of hatching to the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a), 22 and 23, in the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged in the lowered position, the transmission mechanism is such that the second rack 364 is the lowest in the movable range (FIGS. 22 and 23). It is arranged on the lower side of 23), and the urging spring 366 is in the most contracted state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 22) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is caused by the gear train (gears 362a to 362e) to crank the gear 363. The crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 22.

When the crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 22, the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is slid along the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is moved. It is displaced (raised) upward (upper in FIG. 22), and the second pinion 365a is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 22. That is, the transmission gear 365 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 23. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 365 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the speed increasing portion 365b, and the first pinion 351 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 23).

Since the clockwise (clockwise) rotation of FIG. 23 of the first pinion 351 is the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) rotation of FIG. 21 (a) in the other side member 320R, FIG. 21 (clockwise) of the first pinion 351 a) The counterclockwise (counterclockwise) rotation causes the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 to be displaced (lowered) downward (lower side in FIG. 21 (a)). As a result, the displacement member 310 is lowered as shown in FIG. 21 (b), and then the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. 21 (c).

In the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the descending position shown in FIG. 21 (c), as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the transmission mechanism has the second rack 364 at the top of the movable range (FIGS. 24 and 25). It is arranged on the upper side of FIG. 25), and the urging spring 366 is in the most extended state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 24) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is combined with the above-mentioned action via the transmission mechanism. Is transmitted to the first pinion 351 by the opposite action, and the first pinion 351 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 23). As a result, the displacement member 310 is raised as shown in FIG. 21 (b), and then the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position shown in FIG. 21 (a).

Here, in the present embodiment, the linear motion of the second rack 364 is transmitted to the transmission gear 365 and the first pinion 351 to be converted into a rotary motion, and then the rotary motion is transmitted from the first pinion 351 to the first rack 315. By adopting a two-stage rack structure that converts the motion into a linear motion, the stroke amount of the displacement member 310 (first rack 315) is secured. In such a two-stage rack structure, if a third pinion that is rotationally driven by a drive motor 341 is adopted as a configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364, the second rack 364 has a tooth surface for the second pinion 365b. It is necessary to secure each of the tooth surfaces for the third pinion, which leads to an increase in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 22) of the second rack 364.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364 is formed not by the third pinion but by the crank mechanism (eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 and the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the tooth surface for the third pinion in the second rack 364, and the longitudinal dimension of the second rack 364 can be suppressed by that amount.

In this case, the rack groove 364b extends linearly in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the second rack 364 (that is, the direction orthogonal to the linear motion direction of the second rack 364, the left-right direction in FIG. 22). When the crank gear 363 is rotated and the eccentric pin 363a slides on the rack groove 364b, a component other than the linear motion direction of the second rack 364 is generated as a force component applied from the eccentric pin 363a to the rack groove 364b. Can be suppressed, and the resistance can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the energy consumption required for the linear motion of the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

As described above, the detection of the displacement member 310 being arranged at the ascending position shown in FIG. 21A or the descending position shown in FIG. 21C detects the detected portion 363b of the crank gear 363 by the sensor device. It is done by doing. In this case, for example, sensor devices are arranged at the start and end of the movable range of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, and the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position according to the detection result of each of the sensor devices. In the structure for detecting that the sensor device has been installed, it is necessary to dispose the sensor devices at distant positions of the start end and the end in the linear motion of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, and the wiring becomes longer accordingly. If the wiring becomes long, not only the material cost increases, but also it is necessary to route the wiring while avoiding interference with other members, which deteriorates the degree of freedom in design and is involved in the operation of other members. This increases the risk of disconnection. In particular, in the structure in which the transmission mechanism is accommodated between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 facing each other as in the present embodiment, it is difficult to route the wiring while avoiding interference with other members (transmission mechanism). ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position by providing the detected portion 363b on the crank gear 363 and detecting the rotation position (phase) of the detected portion 363 by the sensor device. Since the structure detects that the sensor device has been installed, the sensor devices can be arranged in close proximity to each other. Therefore, since the wiring can be shortened, not only the material cost can be reduced, but also the degree of freedom in design can be improved and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed.

Here, in the structure for raising and lowering the displacement member 310, a larger driving force is required when the displacement member 310 is raised than when it is lowered due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member 310. In this case, in the present embodiment, when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the descending position shown in FIG. 21 (c), the urging spring 366 is in the most extended state as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. Therefore, when the displacement member 310 is raised to the ascending position, the urging force of the urging spring 366 is used to raise the displacement member 310 (that is, the second rack 364 is displaced downward (lower side in FIGS. 24 and 25). It can be used as a force to make it. That is, the driving force of the driving motor 341 can be assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 366.

However, in the structure in which the urging force of the urging spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364 in this way, the transmission of the driving force between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a tends to be unstable. That is, a predetermined tolerance is provided in the guide mechanism for guiding the linear motion of the second rack 364, and a gap exists between the guide mechanism and the second rack 364 due to the tolerance, and the second rack 364 has a second. The rack 364 has rattling. Therefore, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, it cannot be completely displaced on a straight line, and due to the above tolerance (gap), the posture of the second rack 364 is violent (close to the second pinion 365a). Rattling in the direction of the motion) occurs. Therefore, the meshing (teeth) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In this case, in the structure applied to the second rack 364 from the urging spring 366, if the direction of the urging force coincides with the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364, the urging spring 366 The urging force acts as a force that promotes the rampage of the posture of the second rack 364.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is relative to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364. Since it is non-parallel (tilted), the urging force of the urging spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364 as a force in the direction of pressing the second rack 364 toward one side of the guide mechanism for guiding the second rack 364. Can act. As a result, it is possible to make the second rack 364 less likely to rattle and to prevent the posture from becoming violent.

Further, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (tilted) with respect to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is tilted. Even if the posture turbulence occurs once, the urging force of the urging spring 366 can be applied to the second rack 364 as a force in the direction of converging the posture turbulence. Therefore, the meshing (teeth) of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be stabilized, and the transmission of the driving force thereof can be stabilized.

In the present embodiment, the direction of applying the urging force of the urging spring 366 is inclined in the direction of urging the lower end side of the second rack 364 toward the side opposite to the second pinion 365a (for example, the left side of FIG. 22). .. That is, since the urging force is applied in the direction of generating a force component that brings the tooth surface of the second rack 364 closer to the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a, the gap between the two tooth surfaces can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag when transmitting the driving force from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth surfaces, and it is possible to improve the responsiveness. In addition, it is possible to prevent the tooth surfaces from being worn or damaged due to the collision between the tooth surfaces immediately after the driving force from the stopped state is transmitted (initially in meshing). Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be closed, so that the meshing state of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

Here, as described above, in the structure in which the driving force of the drive motor 341 is assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 366, it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the urging spring 366. Therefore, it has been difficult to set the length dimension of the urging spring 366 to be a length dimension that enables the desired urging force to be exerted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the urging spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture, so that the length dimension thereof is secured while avoiding the interference of other members. be able to.

That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are formed in a substantially L-shape in front view from the main body portion and the overhanging portion protruding from the main body portion, whereby the overhanging portion is formed. Is used as an arrangement space for the urging spring 366, so that the urging spring 366 can be arranged in a bent posture, and the rigidity of the structure including the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is increased. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized. Further, since the overhanging portion is overhanging inward from the lower end side of the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the dead space formed below the intermediate member 370 is effective as the arrangement space of the overhanging portion. Can be used for. Further, by forming the connecting shaft 332m in front of the overhanging portion (intermediate base 332), the connecting work with the interposing member 370 can be facilitated, the workability can be improved, and the interposing member can be improved. By interposing the 370, it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the meshing state of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a will be described.

26 (a) to 26 (c) are partially enlarged front views of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and correspond to FIG. 22. In FIG. 26 (b), the second rack 364 is rotated clockwise about the rack shaft 331b with respect to the state of FIG. 26 (a), and in FIG. 26 (c), FIG. 26 (a). ), The state in which the second rack 364 is rotated counterclockwise about the rack shaft 331b is shown in the figure. Further, FIG. 26 shows a state in which the speed-increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state in which the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated). However, the addition of hatching to the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

As described above, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, it cannot be completely displaced on a straight line, and the posture of the second rack 364 is violent due to the tolerance (gap) of the guide mechanism (first). A direction (rattling in the left-right direction in FIG. 26A) occurs in which the two pinions are close to and separated from the pinion 365a. Therefore, the meshing (teeth) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack shaft 331b of the back base 331 is arranged to face the second pinion 365a, and the rack shaft 331b is rotatable and slidable in the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364. Is inserted into. Therefore, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the second pinion 365a can be rotated around the rack shaft 331b, and the tooth surface of the second rack 364 can be rotated. It can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a.

That is, when the posture of the second rack 364 is violent, the violence is not rattling in the direction of approaching and separating from the second pinion 365a (left-right direction in FIG. 26A), but the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. It is possible to regulate the rotation along the (rotation around the rack shaft 331b). As a result, the meshing state of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

In this case, since the guide groove 364a is formed in the plate surface of the second rack 364 and the rack shaft 331b is formed in the region of the back base 331 facing the second rack 364, these guide grooves 364a and the rack shaft are formed. The 331b can be arranged on the trajectory in the linear motion of the second rack 364. That is, it is not necessary to form a portion (guide groove 364a, rack shaft 331b) for making the second rack 364 displaceable along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a outside the outer shape of the second rack 364. Since the space for moving the second rack 364 can be arranged in the dead space where other members cannot be arranged, the space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the operation of the movable mechanism of the displacement member 310 (a structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be displaced relative to the main body portion 311) will be described.

27 (a) to 27 (c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit 300. In addition, in FIG. 27 (a), the progress of the slide displacement coincides with each other in the left and right end side portions 314, and in FIG. 27 (b), the progress of the slide displacement deviates in the left and right end side portions 314. In FIG. 27 (c), the state in which the stopper function is exhibited by the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b is shown by the deviation of the progress of the slide displacement exceeding a predetermined amount.

As described above, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven in the other side member 320R, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via a transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 22 to 25). The first pinion 351 is rotated. The first pinion 351 of the other side member 320R is meshed with the first rack 315 on the other side (right side of FIG. 21) in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310, and the first rack 315 rotates the first pinion 351. Accompanied by linear motion (ascending or descending). At the same time, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven in the one-side member 320L, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism, and the first pinion 351 is rotated. The first pinion 351 of the one-side member 320L is meshed with the first rack 315 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310, and the first rack 315 moves linearly (ascends) with the rotation of the first pinion 351. Or descend). As a result, the displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R) (see FIG. 21).

However, in a structure in which one side of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction is separately guided and driven by the one-side member 320L and the other side in the longitudinal direction is separately guided and driven by the other-side member 320R, the guidance and driving by the one-side member 320 are performed. , The displacement between the guidance and the drive by the other side member 320R is likely to occur. Therefore, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance and drive by the one-side member 320 and the guidance and drive by the other-side member 320R, not only the load of each drive motor 341 becomes excessive, but also the displacement member 310 may be stopped. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protrusion pin 311a of the main body portion 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 12), so that the end side portion 314 and the second portion are inserted with respect to the main body portion 311. One rack 315 is formed so as to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, for example, when the displacement member 310 is raised, the guidance or drive by the one-side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other-side member 320R (for example, one side and the other side). Even if there is a difference in sliding resistance in the slider S of No. 1 or a variation in driving force occurs in the drive motors 341 on one side and the other side), as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the one-side member 320L The linear motion of the first rack 315 (left side in FIG. 27 (b)) guided and driven precedes the linear motion of the first rack 315 (right side in FIG. 27 (b)) guided and driven by the other side member 320R. (Positioned upward in FIG. 27 (b)).

That is, when a deviation occurs between the guidance or drive by the one-side member 320L and the guidance or drive by the other side member 320R, the displacement is shown in FIG. 27 (b) of the displacement member 310. It can be absorbed by a movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are relatively displaceable with respect to the main body portion 311). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 310, and it is possible to prevent the load of each drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and the displacement member 310 from stopping.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the elongated hole 314a constituting the movable mechanism is in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310). Therefore, it is formed in a long hole shape in the direction connecting the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, in the left-right direction in FIG. 27 (a) (see FIG. 13). Therefore, when the guidance or drive by the one-side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other-side member 320R (when a displacement occurs), the main body 311 Displacement (sliding) along the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 of the projecting pin 311a is likely to occur, so that one end side portion 314 is along the guide rod P more than the other end side portion 314. It is possible to reliably perform the transition to the form shown in FIG. 27 (b) in which the displacement precedes.

Two elongated holes 314a are formed in parallel on each end side portion 314, and two protrusion pins 311a are projected on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311. The connection strength between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 can be ensured, and rattling or wobbling of the main body portion 311 when the displacement member 310 is slidably displaced in the vertical direction can be suppressed.

Stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are formed on the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, respectively, and in the assembled state, the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval (see FIG. 12). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the displacement at one end side portion 314 precedes the displacement at the other end side portion 314, the displacement difference exceeds the specified amount, according to FIG. 27 (c). ), The stopper surfaces 311b and 314b can be brought into contact with each other for regulation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the projecting pin 311a from breaking.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor 341 is arranged on each of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, and both sides of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction and the other side are driven (both-sided drive). Compared with the case of the structure driven by the drive motor 341 (one-sided drive), the shared load of the drive motor 341 can be reduced, and the displacement member 310 can be enlarged or the displacement speed of the displacement member 310 can be increased accordingly. Can be planned.

On the other hand, in such a two-sided drive structure, it is impossible to completely synchronize the drive on the one side member 320L side and the drive on the other side member 320R side, and a deviation is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable mechanism (structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be displaced relative to the main body portion 311) is provided on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311. It is formed in two places. Therefore, even if there is a displacement between the drive on the one side member 320L side and the drive on the other side member 320R side, the movable mechanism located on the one side member 320L side of the movable mechanisms formed at the two locations is movable. The movable mechanism located on the other side member 320R side is deformed in different forms depending on the guiding or driving state of the one side member 320L (protruding pin) according to the guiding or driving state of the other side member 320L. 311a can be displaced within the slot 314a).

Therefore, the deviation on one side and the other side can be effectively absorbed by the interlocking of both the movable mechanisms on the one side and the other side. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 310, and it is possible to prevent the load of each drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and the displacement member 310 from stopping.

Next, a method of assembling the transmission mechanism to the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L, which is a rear view of the disassembled other side member 320L. In FIG. 28, the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 28, in assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the drive motor 341 is mounted on the front surface of the intermediate base 332, and on the back surface of the intermediate base 332, the gear shafts 332c to 332g are assembled. After mounting the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363 on the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 on the gear shaft 332i (see FIG. 18 for the gear shafts 332c to 332i), the second rack 364 is mounted on the rack groove. The eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted through the 364b and is meshed with the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365.

Next, the roller 367 is placed on the back surface of the intermediate base 322 in a direction in which the flange portion 367a is brought into contact with the back surface, and then the urging spring 366 is placed. The urging spring 366 is placed in a bent posture while locking the other end to a locking portion formed at the overhanging tip of the overhanging portion of the intermediate base 332. At this stage, one end of the urging spring 366 is not locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 and is held between the roller 367 and a part of the gear train (gears 362a, 362b). NS.

In this case, the urging spring 366 is in a no-load state (a state in which the free length is maintained), so that the urging spring 366 can be stably held in a bent posture. In this case, since a part of the gear train (gears 362a, 362b) is also used as a part for holding the urging spring 366 in a bent posture, a wall portion for holding the urging spring 366 or the like is used. It is not necessary to provide it, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

After forming the state in which the transmission mechanism is attached to the intermediate base 332 (the state shown in FIG. 28) in this way, the front surface of the back base 331 faces the back surface of the intermediate base 332, and both are fastened and fixed. Finally, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c of the back base 331. This completes the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332.

For the work of locking one end of the urging spring 366 to the locking portion of the second rack 364, for example, a jig having a claw shape formed at the tip is used. Specifically, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked (held) by the tip of the jig inserted from the first opening 331c of the back base 331, and the urging spring 366 is elastically deformed (extended) while being elastically deformed (extended) by the second rack. It is locked to the locking portion of 364.

Here, when the urging spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture as in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily secure the arrangement space, while maintaining the bent posture of the urging spring 366. It is difficult, and in the assembly process, a phenomenon occurs in which the urging spring 366 is repelled (jumps due to its own elastic recovery force). That is, in the state shown in FIG. 28 (that is, before the back base 331 is laid on the back side of the intermediate base 332), one end of the urging spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364. Holds the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 with one hand so that the urging spring 366 maintains the bent posture and the second rack 364 does not fall off, while the back base 331 is intermediated with the other hand. It is necessary to perform the work of lining the base 332, which is complicated.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the first opening 331c is formed in a part of the back surface base 331 (the region including one end of the urging spring 366), the back surface base 331 is provided on the back surface of the intermediate base 332. After lining, one end of the urging spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c. That is, by lining the back base 331 first, the back base 331 is arranged to face the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 (that is, the urging spring 366 and the second rack on the back base 331). 364 can be held down), and it is possible to prevent the urging spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. As a result, the work of connecting one end of the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 can be facilitated, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be improved.

Further, by forming the first opening 331c in the back base 331 in this way, not only the workability of the assembly work (attachment work of the urging spring 366) can be improved, but also the urging spring 366 can be improved. Can reduce sliding resistance during elastic deformation (expansion and contraction). That is, as described above, the first opening 331c is formed in the region overlapping the urging spring 366 in the rear view of the back base 331, so that the sliding between the urging spring 366 and the back base 331 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of resistance. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the urging spring 366 from being hindered, the urging force can be stably applied to the second rack 364. Further, even when the urging spring 366 is formed as a metal coil spring and the back surface base 331 is formed of a resin material, the first opening 331c is formed so that the urging spring 366 can be formed. It is possible to prevent the back surface base 331 from being worn due to sliding, and as a result, it is possible to prevent dust generated due to wear from entering electronic devices such as mechanical moving parts and sensor devices and having an adverse effect.

Further, not only the first opening 331c corresponding to one end side of the urging spring 366 but also the second opening 331d corresponding to the other end side of the urging spring 366 is formed in the back base 331. Therefore, the above-mentioned sliding resistance can be reduced and wear can be suppressed.

In this case, the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are formed linearly (that is, only in the region corresponding to the linear portion of the urging spring 366). Therefore, a plate surface (opposing member facing the urging spring 366) can be left at the bent portion of the urging spring 366. Therefore, the facing member is located at a position necessary for maintaining the bent posture of the urging spring 366 while maximizing the effect of reducing the sliding resistance and suppressing the wear while ensuring the maximum formation region of the opening. Can be placed.

Next, the detailed configuration of the annulus forming unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 41.

FIG. 29 is a front view of the annulus forming unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the annulus forming unit 400. In addition, in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a state in which the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the annulus forming unit 400 is composed of a one-sided annulus unit 410L and an other-side annulus unit 410R which are arranged facing each other in a facing posture while being separated by a predetermined interval, and each annulus is formed. A pair of upper and lower ring-divided bodies 440L1, 440L2, 440R1, 440R2 are arranged in the units 410L and 410R, respectively. By operating the ring units 410L and 410R, the ring forming unit 400 moves the ring divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 29 to the center between the facing surfaces of the ring units 410L and 410R. It is displaced to the formation position) to form an annulus shape at the annulus formation position (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

Here, the one-sided annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R have a slight difference in shape, but the portion exhibiting the technical function is symmetrical except for the positioning mechanism (center between facing each other). Since they are formed symmetrically with respect to the virtual plane located in () and their configurations are substantially the same, the other side annular unit 410R will be described as a representative example, and the one side annular unit 410L will be described below. Is omitted. The positioning mechanism will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the other side annular unit 410R, and FIG. 32 is a rear view of the other side annular unit 410R. Note that FIGS. 31 and 32 show a state in which the ring-divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 are arranged at the ring-forming positions.

Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled other side annular unit 410R as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled other side annular unit 410R as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an annular unit 410R. It should be noted that FIGS. 33 and 34 correspond to a state in which the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the other-side annular unit 410R includes a rear base 420, a drive mechanism 430 arranged on the rear base 420, and an annular division 440R1 driven by the drive mechanism 430. , 440R2, the posture defining member 450 that defines the posture of the ring-divided bodies 440R1, 440R2, the hanging mechanism 460 that suspends and supports the upper portion of the posture defining member 450 on the back base 420, and the posture defining member 450. It is mainly provided with a lower end guide mechanism 470 that guides the lower end and a cover body 480 that is covered with the back base 420. Here, the back base 420 will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the rear base 420. As shown in FIG. 35, the rear base 420 is formed from a main body portion formed in a vertically long shape in front view, an upper overhanging portion protruding laterally from the upper end of the main body portion, and an upper overhanging portion thereof. It is formed in a substantially inverted F shape when viewed from the front with the lower overhanging portion protruding laterally from the main body portion at a position below the main body.

A motor shaft insertion window 421 is formed in the rear base 420 in the main body portion, and the upper rack shaft 422a, the lower rack shaft 422b, the gear shaft 423, the upper arm shaft 425a, and the lower arm shaft 426 are formed from the front of the main body portion. Are thrust at each. The motor shaft insertion window 421 is an opening for connecting the drive shaft of the drive motor 431 attached to the back surface of the rear base 420 to the gear 361 of the drive mechanism on the front side of the rear base 420.

The upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are inserted into the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d (both of which see FIG. 36) of the third rack 433 of the drive mechanism to guide the linear motion of the third rack 433. It is a shaft-shaped body with a circular cross section. The diameters of the upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are set to the same or slightly smaller dimensions as the groove widths of the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d of the third rack.

The gear shaft 423 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the transmission gear 434 (see FIG. 36) of the drive mechanism, and the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 are the upper arms of the drive mechanism. It is a tubular body having an annular cross section for rotatably supporting the rotation bases 435a and 436a (see FIG. 36) of the body 435 and the lower arm body 436, respectively.

A cover body 480 is laid (fastened and fixed) in the area corresponding to the upper rack shaft 422a, the gear shaft 423, and the upper and lower arm shafts 425 and 426 on the front surface of the back base 420, and the cover body 480 and the back base 420 are fixed. The upper end side of the third rack 433, the transmission gear 434, and the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 (rotating base portions 435a and 436a) are accommodated between the two racks (see FIG. 31).

A hanging mechanism 460 is arranged (fastened and fixed) on the upper overhanging portion of the back base 420, and a lower end guide mechanism 470 is arranged on the lower end and the lower overhanging portion of the main body portion of the back base 420 (fastening and fixing). Fastened and fixed) (see FIGS. 31 to 33 for both). As will be described later, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported in a state where it can be slidably displaced in the left-right direction to the front (front) side of the back base 420 via the hanging mechanism 460, and the posture defining member 450 is supported in the left-right direction. The rattling (swaying) in the front-rear direction when the slide is displaced to is regulated by the lower end guide mechanism 470. The lower end side of the third rack 433 and the gear 432 are accommodated between the lower end guide mechanism 470 and the rear base 420 (see FIG. 31).

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34. The drive mechanism 430 is a mechanism that displaces the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 by the driving force of the drive motor 431, and is fixed to the drive motor 431 attached to the back surface of the rear base 420 and the drive shaft of the drive motor 431. The gear 432 is driven by the gear 432, the third rack 433 driven by the gear 432 and linearly moved, the transmission gear 434 driven by the linear motion of the third rack 433, and the transmission gear 434 driven to rotate. The upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are mainly provided. Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the detailed configuration of the drive mechanism 430 and its operation will be described.

FIG. 36A is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in a state where the annular division bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 36B is a front view of the annular division bodies 440R1 and 440R2. It is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in the state which the posture which arranges a ring | ring formation position is formed. Note that in FIG. 36, the drive motor 431 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), the third rack 433 is formed in a vertically long flat plate shape in front view, and has an upper rack portion 433a and a lower rack 433b, and an upper guide groove 433c and a lower guide groove. It includes 433d. The upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b are portions formed as racks by cutting gears on the upper end side and the lower end side side surfaces (the left side surface of FIG. 36 (a)) of the flat plate-shaped body, respectively. A transmission gear 434 is meshed with the rack portion 433b on the upper end side, and a gear 432 is meshed with the rack portion 433a on the lower end side.

The upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d are openings through which the upper rack shaft 422a and the lower rack shaft 422b (see FIG. 35) of the rear base 420 are inserted, and are adjacent to the upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b, respectively. At the position where the teeth are to be formed, they are linearly extended in the vertical direction (that is, the longitudinal direction of the flat plate-shaped body (third rack 433), the vertical direction in FIG. 36 (a)) in parallel with their tooth surfaces.

The upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed as flat plate-shaped elongated bodies, with rotating bases 435a and 436a on the base end side of the elongated body and rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b on the distal end side of the elongated body. Are formed respectively.

The rotation bases 435a and 436a are provided with circular shaft holes in front view for being rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420, respectively, and along the outer peripheral surface. Gears are engraved. That is, the rotation bases 435a and 436a are formed as gears rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the back base 420. The gear at the rotation base 435a of the upper arm body 435 is meshed with the gear at the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436, and the gear at the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 is meshed with the transmission gear 434.

The rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b are portions connected to the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2, and as will be described later, the annulus-divided body via the arm connecting groove 451 (see FIG. 37) of the posture defining member 450. They are rotatably connected to the rotary connecting portion 441 (see FIG. 34) projecting from the back surface of the 440R1 and 440R2, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the drive mechanism 430, the third rack 433 is at the lowermost position of the movable range in a state in which the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions (FIG. It is arranged on the lower side of 36), and the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are arranged in a vertical direction along the longitudinal direction thereof (that is, on an extension of a virtual line along the longitudinal direction of each arm body 435, 436). The posture in which the arm shafts 425 and 426 of the rear base 420 are located).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the annular split bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged in the retracted position, the upper arm body 435 can be erected until it is in the vertical posture. As will be described later, the ring-divided body 440R1 can be sufficiently retracted rearward, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 431 can be suppressed.

From the state shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the gear 432 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 36) by the driving force of the drive motor 431, the rotation of the gear 432 causes the third rack 433. Is displaced (raised) upward (upward in FIG. 36 (a)), and the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 36 (a).

When the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 36 (a), the rotation of the transmission gear 434 causes the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 to rotate clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 36 (a). And the rotation of the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 causes the rotation base 435a of the upper arm body 435 to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 36. As a result, the tip end side (rotational connecting portion 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is lowered, while the tip end side (rotational connecting portion 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is raised, as shown in FIG. 36 (b). A posture is formed in which the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the ring-forming positions.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), in a state in which the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the ring-forming positions, the third rack 433 is at the lowermost part of the movable range (lower side of FIG. 36). ) Is placed. From this state, when the gear 432 is rotated in the opposite direction (clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 36) by the driving force of the drive motor 431, the rotation of the gear 432 is transmitted via the third rack 433 and the transmission gear 434. It is transmitted to the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 and the rotation base 435a of the upper arm body 435 by an action opposite to the above-mentioned action. As a result, the tip end side (rotary connecting portion 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is raised, while the tip end side (rotary connecting portion 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is lowered, as shown in FIG. 36 (a). A posture is formed in which the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

According to the present embodiment, the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed with rotating bases 435a and 436a on their base end sides, and the gears of the rotating bases 435a and 436a are meshed with each other. Since the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are rotatably supported by the rear base 420 in the state, the rotations of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be synchronized with each other. As a result, as will be described later, the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 arranged on the tip side of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be brought into contact with each other with high accuracy at the ring-forming position (FIG. 31). And FIG. 32). Further, if the rotation base portion 436a of the lower arm body 436 is rotationally driven, the upper arm body 435 can also be driven and rotated via the teeth of the rotation base portions 435a and 436a. Therefore, two arms (upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436) can be rotationally driven by one drive motor 431, and it is not necessary to provide a drive source for each arm. Can be improved.

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34. The posture defining member 450 is a member for defining the posture of the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. That is, when the ring-divided bodies R1,440R2 are displaced between the retracted position and the ring-forming position, the ring-divided body R1,440R2 slides and displaces in the left-right direction along with the displacement of the ring-divided bodies R1,440R2. The postures of the bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are maintained in a non-rotating state (that is, they are displaced between the retracted position and the ring formation position while maintaining the parallel postures). Here, the detailed configuration of the posture defining member 450 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the posture defining member 450. In FIG. 37, a state in which the upper end of the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported by the suspension mechanism 460 and the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is guided by the lower end guiding mechanism 470 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 37, the posture defining member 450 is a front surface interposed between the tip sides (rotational connecting portions 435b and 436b) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 and the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. It is a vertically long flat plate-shaped member (see FIGS. 31 and 32), and a set consisting of three grooves of a pair of posture defining grooves 452 located sandwiching the arm connecting groove 451 and the arm connecting groove 451 is vertically 2 A pair is formed.

The arm connecting groove 451 connects the rotary connecting portions 435a and 436 (see FIG. 36) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 and the rotary connecting portions 441 (see FIG. 34) of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. (That is, the direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the posture defining member 450 by the hanging mechanism 460, the vertical direction in FIG. 37). The posture defining groove 452 is an opening through which the sliding shaft 442 (see FIG. 34) of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 is inserted via the collar C, and is linear in the vertical direction parallel to the arm connecting shaft 451. It will be extended to.

The groove width of the arm connecting shaft 451 is such that the connecting portion between the rotating connecting portions 435a and 436 of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 and the rotating connecting portion 441 of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 is rotatable in the groove and along the groove. The size is set so that it can be slidable, and the width of the posture-determining groove 452 is set so that the sliding shaft 442 (color C) of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 can slide along the groove. ..

That is, the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are rotatably connected to the ring dividing bodies 440R1 and 440R2 via the arm connecting shaft 451 while the ring dividing bodies 440R1 and 440R2 slide into the posture defining groove 452. By inserting the moving shaft 442, the posture defining member 450 is made non-rotatable, while the sliding displacement in the vertical direction is maintained in an allowed state. Therefore, as will be described later, when the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are rotated, the posture defining member 450 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, and the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 maintain their postures in parallel. At the same time, the arm connecting shaft 451 and the posture defining groove 452 are slid and displaced in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

The suspension mechanism 460 is arranged (fastened and fixed) on the overhanging portion (see FIGS. 31 and 35) of the back base 420, and is arranged on the horizontally long flat plate-shaped base portion 461 in front view and the base portion 461 thereof. It is provided with a brass guide rod 462 formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section. The guide rod 462 is arranged in a posture along the left-right direction with the base portion 461 arranged on the back base 420. A cylindrical slider portion 453 is arranged at the upper end of the posture defining member 450, and the guide rod 462 is inserted through the slider portion 453. As a result, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported on the back surface base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 in a state where it can be slidably displaced in the left-right direction.

The lower end guide mechanism 460 is a member arranged (fastened and fixed) at the lower end of the main body portion of the back base 420 and the lower overhanging portion (see FIGS. 31 and 35), and is arranged at the lower overhanging portion of the back base 420. A guide groove 471 is formed in the portion to be provided. The guide groove 471 is displaced in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the posture defining member 450 (the direction in which the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is displaced when the posture defining member 450 is rotated around the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460). Is a portion for regulating the displacement within a predetermined range, and is formed as a concave groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section extending above (upper side in FIG. 37) and extending along a direction parallel to the guide rod 462. ..

The groove width of the guide groove 471 is set to be larger than the plate thickness at the lower end of the posture defining member 450, and the guide groove 471 is formed on the front surface and the back surface at the lower end of the posture defining member 450 suspended and supported by the suspension mechanism 460. On the other hand, the inner side surfaces of the guide grooves 471 facing each other are arranged at positions facing each other with a predetermined interval. That is, the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471, and when the posture defining member 450 is in a stable state, the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is not in contact with the inner surface of the guide groove 471. Will be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper end side of the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported by the back base 420 via the hanging mechanism 460, and the lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Therefore, the operation of suppressing the resistance when the posture defining member 450 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the back base 420 and displaces the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 by the rotation of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 (FIG. 39 to 41) can be performed smoothly.

For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are arranged on the back base 420 and the upper and lower ends of the posture defining member 450 are guided by the pair of guide shafts, there are two sliding portions, and the frictional resistance increases. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the sliding portion can be set to one place, the frictional resistance when the posture defining member 450 slides and displaces can be suppressed. Further, according to the present embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is rotated around the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460, so that the lower end side of the posture defining member 450 is placed on the inner surface of the guide groove 471 of the lower end guiding mechanism 470. Even if they come into contact with each other, since they are suspended and supported, the posture defining member 450 can be self-corrected to a posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the posture defining member 450 can be returned to a state in which the lower end side thereof is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Therefore, from this point as well, the frictional resistance when the posture defining member 450 slides and displaces can be reduced.

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34. A rotary connecting portion 441 and a sliding shaft 442 are projected from the back surface of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. As described above, the rotary connecting portion 441 is connected to the rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 via the arm connecting shaft 441 of the posture defining member 450, and the sliding shaft 442 is a collar. It is inserted into the posture defining groove 452 of the posture defining member 450 via C.

As a result, the ring-divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are laterally displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the posture-determining member 450 as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 rotate, and are slid-displaced in the left-right direction together with the posture-determining member 450. As a result, while maintaining the parallel posture, the displacement between the retracted position and the ring forming position is displaced by an arc-shaped locus, and at the ring forming position, the ring dividing bodies 440L1, 440L2 and the ring dividing are formed. The bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are in contact with each other to form an annular shape (see FIG. 41).

In this case, a positioning mechanism is formed on each of the contact surfaces of the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, whereby the objects displaced by the arc-shaped locus are properly brought into contact with each other and the backlash after contact is achieved. It can suppress wobbling and wobbling. Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the positioning mechanism formed on the contact surface of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 will be described.

The positioning mechanism is formed on each of the contact surfaces of the annular divisions 440L1 to 440R2, and since they all have the same configuration, the contact between the annular divisions 440L1 and the annular divisions 440R2. The positioning mechanism formed on the contact surface will be described as a typical example, and the description of the positioning mechanism formed on the other contact surface will be omitted.

38 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the ring-divided body 440L1 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIa of FIG. 29, and FIG. 38 (b) is a portion of the ring-divided body 440R1 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb of FIG. 29. It is an enlarged side view, FIG. 38 (c) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the annular division body 440L1 in the line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 38 (d) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of FIG. 38 (b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the ring division body 440R1 in the line XXXVIIId-XXXVIIId.

As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (d), the positioning mechanism accepts the positioning convex portion 491 projecting from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular split body 440R1 and the positioning convex portion 491 thereof. As possible recesses, a positioning recess 492 recessed in the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 440L1, an engaging convex portion 492a projecting from the recessed bottom surface of the positioning recess 492, and the engaging convex The portion 492a is formed as a recess that can accept the portion 492a, and is provided with an engaging recess 491a that is recessed in the protruding tip surface of the positioning convex portion 491.

As shown in FIGS. 38 (b) and 38 (d), the positioning convex portion 491 is formed on the upper and lower side surfaces (upper surface and lower side of FIG. 38 (d)) so as to taper toward the tip of the protrusion. The front and rear side surfaces (the right side surface and the left side surface in FIG. 38B) are formed as tapered surfaces that are inclined in a direction that narrows the facing interval toward the tip of the protrusion. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the positioning recess 492 has a direction in which the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces (the upper surface and the lower surface in FIG. 38 (a)) becomes narrower toward the concave bottom surface. It is formed as a tapered surface that inclines toward. As a result, even if there is a positional deviation between the annular division body 440L1 and the annular division body 440R1, the positioning convex portion 491 is moved to the positioning concave portion 492 at the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. It can be easily accepted.

The extended length of the positioning recess 492 (FIG. 38 (a) vertical length) is longer than the extended length of the positioning convex portion 491 (FIG. 38 (b) vertical length) (FIG. 38). (See (d)), these extending directions are taken to be directions corresponding to the arcuate loci of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 (that is, directions along the moving loci when the contact surface is viewed from the front). .. As a result, when the ring-divided bodies 440L1,440R1 are brought close to each other by an arc-shaped locus and the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, one of the ring-divided bodies 440L1,440R1 precedes the other, and both of them Even if there is a misalignment between them, the positioning convex portion 491 can be easily accepted by the positioning concave portion 492 at the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other.

The engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a are engaged with each other (concavo-convex fitting) at the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are brought into contact with each other to achieve final positioning. The protrusion height of the engaging convex portion 492a is set to be smaller than the concave depth of the positioning concave portion 492, and the concave depth of the engaging concave portion 491a is set to be smaller than the concave depth of the positioning concave portion 492. The size is set smaller than the height of the protrusion.

As a result, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning with relatively coarse positioning accuracy (relatively wide allowable range of misalignment) is performed by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Therefore, while the protruding tip of the positioning convex portion 491 can be reliably received by the positioning concave portion 492 and the subsequent guidance to the proper positioning position can be smoothly performed, when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. In the final stage of the above, by engaging the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a with each other, the positioning accuracy is improved, the ring shape is properly formed, and the rattling after the ring shape is formed. It enables two-step positioning that can surely suppress wobbling.

The operation of the annulus forming unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.

39 (a) and 39 (b) are front and rear views of the annulus forming unit 400 in a state where the annulus divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIGS. 40 (b) is a front view and a rear view of the annulus forming unit 400 in a state where the annulus divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged between the retracted position and the annulus forming position, and is a front view and a rear view of the annulus forming unit 400. 41 (b) is a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit 400 in a state where the ring dividing bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming positions.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), at the retracted position, the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are set to be the most separated from each other. That is, the distance between the posture-determining members 450 of the one-side ring unit 410L and the other-side ring unit 410R is maximized (that is, each posture-determining member 450 is arranged at the most retracted position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the distance between the ring-divided bodies 440L1, 440L2 and the ring-divided bodies 440R1, 440R2 in the left-right direction is maximized. Further, by arranging the annular divisions 440L1 to 440R2 at the upper end or the lower end of each posture defining member 450, the distance between the annular divisions 440L1 and 440R1 and the annular divisions 440L2 and 440R2 in the vertical direction is increased. Is the maximum.

When the drive mechanism 430 is operated from this state and the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are rotated (see FIG. 36), each posture defining member 450 moves in the left-right direction as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 rotate. By advancing each of them, the ring-divided bodies 440L1, 440L2 and the ring-divided bodies 440R1, 440R2 are displaced in the direction of narrowing the facing distance in the left-right direction, and the ring-splitting members 450 are divided into rings. The bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are lowered or raised, respectively, and the distance between the ring-divided bodies 440L1, 440R1 and the ring-divided bodies 440L2, 440R2 in the vertical direction is narrowed, and the state shown in FIG. 40 is formed.

When the operation of the drive mechanism 430 is further advanced from the state shown in FIG. 40, each posture defining member 450 is arranged at the most advanced position in the left-right direction as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 rotate. The annular divided bodies 440L1, 440L2 and the annular divided bodies 440R1, 440R2 are displaced in the left-right direction to the positions where the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, and the annular divided bodies 440L1, 440R1 and the annular divided bodies 440L2 are displaced. The 440R2 is displaced (up or down) in the vertical direction to a position where the contact surfaces of the 440R2 are brought into contact with each other. As a result, as shown in FIG. 41, the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring-forming positions, and the ring shape is formed.

As described above, according to the ring forming unit 400, the slide displacement in the left-right direction by the suspension mechanism 460 of the posture-determining member 450 and the ring-divided body 440L1 to along the grooves 451 and 452 of the posture-determining member 450. By the sliding displacement of the 440R2 in the vertical direction, the postures of the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 can be displaced in an arcuate locus while maintaining a constant (parallel) posture, and a ring shape can be formed at the ring formation position.

Here, as a mechanism for displacing each of the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, a parallel link mechanism (a mechanism provided with a first arm and a second arm which are parallel to each other and have the same length) can also be used. It is possible to form an annular shape at the formation position. For example, focusing on the ring-divided body R1, the base end sides of the first arm and the second arm are rotatably connected to the back base 420, and the tip ends of the first arm and the second arm are connected to the ring-divided body 440R1. By rotatably connecting and rotating the first arm and the second arm, the ring-divided body 440R1 can be displaced while maintaining a constant posture. Therefore, by providing such a mechanism for each of the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, the ring can be formed at the ring-forming position.

However, in such a structure using the parallel link mechanism, interference between the first arm and the second arm occurs, so that the operating range of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 cannot be sufficiently secured. For example, focusing on the ring-divided body 440R1, in the present embodiment, the upper arm body 435 is tilted in the horizontal direction at the ring-forming position (see FIGS. 36 (b) and 41), and the upper arm body is tilted at the retracted position. When the 435 is erected in the vertical direction, similarly, in the parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm are tilted in the horizontal direction at the ring forming position, and the first arm and the second arm are tilted at the retracted position. Will stand upright. In this case, in the parallel link mechanism, when the first arm and the second arm are raised and lowered in the retracted position, one arm interferes with the base end side of the other arm, so that the parallel link mechanism cannot stand in a vertical posture. .. Therefore, the ring-divided body 440R1 cannot be sufficiently retracted backward.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is arranged so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the back base 420, and the rotation of the ring-divided body 440R1 is restricted with respect to the posture defining member 450. While being arranged so that it can be slidably displaced in the vertical direction, the base end side of the upper arm body 435 is connected to the back base 420 and the tip end side is rotatably connected to the ring split body 440R1 to form a circle. The ring-split body 440R1 is displaced while maintaining a constant posture. That is, unlike the case of the parallel link mechanism, it does not require two arms and can be configured with only one arm (upper arm body 435). As a result, since interference between the arms does not occur, the upper arm body 435 can be erected until it is in a vertical posture (see FIG. 36 (a)), and the annular division body 440R1 is sufficiently retracted rearward. Can be done.

Further, for example, in the parallel link mechanism, since the first arm and the second arm are tilted at the retracted position, the weight of the annular split body 440R1 tilts the first arm and the second arm in the tilting direction (that is, that is). It acts as a force to collapse in the direction of forming the ring formation position). Therefore, it is necessary to support the weight of the ring-divided body R1 by the driving force of the drive motor 431, which increases energy consumption.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the upper arm body 435 can be in a vertically standing posture at the retracted position, the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 can be supported by the upper arm body 435. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 431 required to support the weight of the ring-divided body 440R1 (hold it in the retracted position) can be suppressed or unnecessary, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

When the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring-forming position shown in FIG. 41, positioning is performed by the positioning mechanism as described above (see FIG. 38).

Specifically, a positioning convex portion 491 is projected on the contact surface of the annular split body 440R1, and a positioning recess 492 is recessed on the contact surface of the annular split body 440L1 to provide a positioning recess. Since the extended length of 492 (FIG. 38 (a) vertical dimension) is set to be larger than the extended length of the positioning convex portion 491 (FIG. 38 (b) vertical dimension), the annular body is divided. When the 440L1 and 440R1 are displaced toward the ring formation position and the contact surfaces of the 440L1 and 440R1 are brought close to each other, the positioning convex portion 491 is received (engaged) with the positioning concave portion 492 to perform positioning. can.

That is, since the contact surfaces of the ring-divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are close to each other in an arcuate (circular motion) locus, the concave and convex shapes having the same dimensions have a convex shape. I can't match. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the positioning recess 492 is extended as a long hole longer than the positioning convex portion 491 along its trajectory, so that the positioning convex portion 492 has a positioning convex portion 492. 491 can be accepted (engaged).

On the other hand, in the positioning only by engaging the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492, the positioning is orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492 (FIG. 38 (a) left-right direction, FIG. 41 (a)). Limited to the vertical direction of the paper). That is, even when the ring-divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are close to each other due to the arc-shaped regulation, the positioning concave portion 492 is larger than the extended length of the positioning convex portion 491 so that the positioning concave portion 492 can accept the positioning convex portion 491. Since the extension length of the 492 is increased, the positioning protrusion 491 cannot be engaged with the extension direction of the positioning recess 492. Therefore, the ring-divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 cannot be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492, and rattling or wobbling occurs.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the engaging concave portion 491a is formed in the positioning convex portion 491, and the engaging convex portion 492a is formed in the positioning concave portion 492. When arranged at the position, the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a can be engaged with each other, and as a result, the annular divided bodies 440L1, 440R1 can be positioned with each other even in the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492. It can be done, and the occurrence of rattling and wobbling can be suppressed.

It is also conceivable that the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492 are omitted, and the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are positioned by using only the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a. However, in this case, it is difficult to accept (engage) the engaging convex portion 492a in the engaging concave portion 491a due to the elastic deformation of the upper arm body 435 and the dimensional tolerance of the sliding portion and the rotating portion. It becomes. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the positioning convex portion 491 is first engaged with the positioning concave portion 492 to perform the first-stage positioning, and then the engaging concave portion 491a is covered as the second-stage positioning. Since the engaging convex portion 492a is engaged, the positioning in the second stage (engagement of the engaging convex portion 492a with the engaging concave portion 491a) can be reliably performed, and the above-described annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 can be engaged. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling and wobbling.

That is, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, the positioning accuracy is relatively coarse (the allowable range of misalignment is relatively wide) due to the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492 (first stage). By performing (positioning), it is possible to ensure that the protruding tip of the positioning convex portion 491 is received by the positioning concave portion 492 and to smoothly guide the positioning convex portion 492 to the proper positioning position thereafter, while it is possible to smoothly guide the contact surfaces to each other. In the final stage of contacting the two, the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a are engaged with each other (positioning in the second stage) to improve the positioning accuracy and properly form the annular shape. It is possible to reliably suppress rattling and wobbling after forming an annular shape.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. 42 (a) and 42 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 according to the second embodiment. Further, FIGS. 42 (c) and 42 (d) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state where the relative displacement is formed by the ball joint mechanism.

Note that FIG. 42 (a) corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11 (b), and FIG. 42 (b) corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11 (b). Further, FIGS. 42 (c) and 42 (d) correspond to enlarged portions of FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), respectively.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 and the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable has been described. The main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the second embodiment are connected by a ball joint 2610 so as to be relatively displaceable. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (d), in the displacement member 2310 in the second embodiment, between the back surface of the main body portion 2311 on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction and the front surface of the end side portion 2314. Are connected by a pair of upper and lower ball joints 2610. The ball joint 2610 is formed by connecting the spheres (ball portions) at both ends with a rod-shaped body, and by bringing the spheres at both ends into spherical contact with the socket portions formed on the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314, respectively. The portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are connected in a state where they can rotate relative to each other in an arbitrary direction.

The socket portion of the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 is a cover in which a hemispherical spherical surface is recessed in a portion where a hemispherical spherical surface is recessed in the back surface of the main body portion 2311 and the front surface of the end side portion 2314. By lining the bodies 2311d and 2314d, they are formed by their spherical surfaces. Further, the cover bodies 2311a and 2314a are formed with tapered surfaces for avoiding interference with the rod-shaped body of the ball joint 2610.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are connected via the ball joint mechanism, the relative displacement can be smoothly performed in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 2310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or drive by the one-side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other-side member 320R (for example, the slider S on one side and the other side). If there is a difference in sliding resistance or if there is a variation in driving force between the drive motors 341 on one side and the other side), even if there is a displacement between the two, the deviation is determined by the ball joint mechanism. It can be absorbed by the relative displacement of the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 (see FIG. 27). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 2310, and it is possible to prevent the load of each drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and the displacement member 2310 from stopping.

Further, in the displacement member 2310 of the present embodiment, an urging spring 2620 is interposed between the back surface of the main body portion 2311 on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction and the front surface of the end side portion 2314. The urging spring 2620 is formed as a coil spring and is interposed between the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 2620 acts as a force for keeping the facing distance between the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 constant.

In this way, when the urging spring 2620 is interposed so that the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are relatively displaced via the ball joint mechanism in order to absorb the above-mentioned deviation, those main body portions are used. The 2311 and the end side portion 2314 can be returned to the initial positions by the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the urging spring 2620.

The urging spring 2620 is arranged with a ball joint 2620 (rod-shaped body) inserted in the inner circumference thereof. As a result, the ball joint 2610 can also be used as a mechanism for holding the urging spring 2620 so as not to fall off, and it is not necessary to separately provide a holding mechanism. Therefore, the structure is simplified and the component cost is reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. 43 (a) and 43 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 3310 according to the third embodiment. Further, FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state where the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is elastically deformed.

Note that FIG. 43 (a) corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11 (b), and FIG. 43 (b) corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11 (b). Further, FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d) correspond to enlarged portions of FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), respectively.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 and the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable has been described. The main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the third embodiment are connected by a rubber-like elastic body 3630 so as to be relatively displaceable. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), in the displacement member 3310 in the third embodiment, between the back surface of the main body portion 3311 on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction and the front surface of the end side portion 3314. Are connected by a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630. The rubber-like elastic body 3630 is formed in a columnar shape from an elastomer, and by elastically deforming itself, the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are connected in a state capable of relative rotation in an arbitrary direction. The rubber-like elastic body 3630 is arranged so that its axial direction is perpendicular to the back surface of the main body portion 3311 and the front surface of the end side portion 3314.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are connected via the rubber-like elastic body 3630, the relative displacement can be smoothly performed in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 3310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or drive by the one-side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other-side member 320R (for example, the slider S on one side and the other side). If there is a difference in sliding resistance in the above, or if there is a variation in the driving force between the drive motors 341 on one side and the other side), even if there is a displacement between the two, the displacement will be determined by the rubber-like elastic body. It can be absorbed by relative displacement of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 due to the elastic deformation of the 3630 itself (see FIG. 27). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 3310, and it is possible to prevent the load of each drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and the displacement member 3310 from stopping.

Further, when the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are relatively displaced due to elastic deformation of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 in order to absorb the above-mentioned deviation, the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are elastically elastic. It can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the body 3630.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is made of an elastomer, the vibrations of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are quickly converged by utilizing the viscous characteristic (damping effect) of the elastomer. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the influence of the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 causes a difference between the guidance or drive by the one side member 320L and the guidance or drive by the other side member 320R, and as a result, as described above. The occurrence of deviation can be suppressed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44. 44 (a) is a rear view of the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 44 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 4310 in the XLIVb-XLIVb line of FIG. 44 (a).

In the first embodiment, a case where a drive motor 341 is arranged on each of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R to drive one side in the longitudinal direction and both sides of the other side of the displacement member 310 (both-side drive) will be described. However, in the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 is arranged only on the one side member 320L (that is, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted), and only one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 4310 is driven. (One-sided drive). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment has a movable mechanism (end side portion 314 with respect to the main body portion 4311) on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 44 (a)) with respect to the displacement member 310 in the first embodiment. The structure that allows the 4314 to be relatively displaceable) and the configuration of the first rack 4315 are different, and the other configurations are the same as each other. In the following, only different configurations will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment is projected from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 44 (a)) of the main body portion 4311. The number of protrusions of the setting pin 311a is set to 1. The arrangement position of the projecting pin 311a on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 44 (a)) is a pair of upper and lower arranged on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 44 (a)). It is set to the intermediate position of the projecting pin 311a.

On the other hand, a shaft support hole 4314a is bored in only one place in the end side portion 4314 connected to the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 44A) of the main body portion 4311. The shaft support hole 4314a is a circular hole in the front view for receiving the projecting pin 311a on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 4311, and its inner diameter is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the collar C cylinder. Set. Therefore, the projecting pin 311a is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 4314a via the collar C.

That is, on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 44A), as described above, the main body portion 311 is displaced relative to the end side portion 314 along the left-right direction (major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a) (slide). Displacement) is possible, but on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 44A), only rotation around the protrusion pin 311a is allowed as a relative displacement of the main body 4311 with respect to the end 4314. NS.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted, the first rack 4315 arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 44A) is the slider holding portion 315. It is formed with only (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted). As a result, the displacement member 4310 is guided along the guide rod P on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 44A) and is driven by the one-side member 320L (drive motor 431), whereas the displacement member 4310 is driven in the longitudinal direction. The other side (left side in FIG. 44A) is only guided along the guide rod P, and is not driven by the other side member 320R (drive motor 431).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, since it is formed as a one-side drive that drives only one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 4310, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and its driving force are transmitted to the first rack 4315. The transmission mechanism for this can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 4310 is moved up and down, since it is driven on one side, the guidance by the one-side member 320L and the guidance by the other-side member 320R are the guidance on the drive side and the guidance on the driven side. And their states are different from each other. Therefore, if the movable mechanism (structure that allows the end side portions 314 and 4314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 4311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member 4310 will be moved up and down as described above. The displacement cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form relative displacements (different forms of allowable relative displacements). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can be made to bear a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively.

Specifically, the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 44A), which is the driven side, allows only relative rotation with respect to the end side portion 4314 of the main body portion 4311, while the longitudinal direction on the driving side. The movable mechanism on one side (right side in FIG. 44A) allows relative rotation and relative displacement (slide displacement) of the main body portion 4311 with respect to the end side portion 4314.

As a result, both movable mechanisms can be made to bear a deformation form suitable for the driving side and a deformation form suitable for the driven side, respectively, and a displacement occurs between the guidance by the one-side member 320L and the guidance by the other-side member 320R. Can be effectively absorbed as a whole of the displacement member 4310. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 4310 even with one-sided drive, and it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and the displacement member 4310 from stopping.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45. 45 (a) is a rear view of the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a). 45 (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 in the XLVc-XLVc line of FIG. 45 (a).

In the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, one-sided drive is adopted, and the movable mechanism on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (the end side portion 3314 can be displaced relative to the main body portion 5311). Structures) are different from each other. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment allows the movable mechanism on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (the end side portion 3314 relative to the main body portion 5311) to be displaced relative to the displacement member 310 in the first embodiment. The structure) and the configuration of the first rack 3315 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 45A) are different, and the other configurations are the same as each other. In the following, only different configurations will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (b), in the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment, the back surface and the end side portion 3314 on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 45 (a)) of the main body portion 5311. A pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 are provided between the front and the back, and a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies are provided between the back surface of the main body 5311 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 45 (a)) and the front surface of the end side 3314. Each is connected by the body 5630. That is, it is the same as the case of the third embodiment. However, although the rubber-like elastic body 5630 is formed in the same shape as the rubber-like elastic body 3630, the rubber hardness is set to a value higher (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630, and the spring constant is high. (Difficult to deform).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted, so that the drive motor 341 is arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 45A). The first rack 4315 is formed to have only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force thereof to the first rack 4315 can be omitted, and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, if the movable mechanism (structure that allows the end side portion 3314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 5311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction because it is driven on one side, the displacement member 5310 The above-mentioned displacement when the vehicle is moved up and down cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form relative displacements (different forms of allowable relative displacements). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can be made to bear a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively.

Specifically, the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 5630 constituting the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 45 (a)), which is the driven side, is the other side in the longitudinal direction (Fig. 45 (a)), which is the driving side. ) Since it is set to a value higher (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 that constitutes the movable mechanism on the right side), the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction) is less likely to be deformed than the driving side (constant). The amount of deformation allowed when an external force is applied can be reduced).

As a result, both movable mechanisms can be made to bear a deformation form suitable for the driving side and a deformation form suitable for the driven side, respectively, and a displacement occurs between the guidance by the one-side member 320L and the guidance by the other-side member 320R. Can be effectively absorbed as a whole of the displacement member 5310. As a result, even if it is driven on one side, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 5310, and it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and the displacement member 5310 from stopping.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are front views of the displacement member 6310 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG. 46 (a) shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven upward, and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven downward. Further, in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 in front view (hereinafter referred to as “center of gravity position G”) is schematically illustrated using black circles.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 313 has its center of gravity position at the center of rotation has been described, but in the rotating body 6313 of the sixth embodiment, its center of gravity position G is eccentric from the center of rotation, and due to the rotation thereof. It is formed so that the position of the center of gravity can be changed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment has a rack portion 315a from the first rack on the other side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b)) with respect to the displacement member 310 in the first embodiment. The only difference is that the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric, and the other configurations are the same as each other. In the following, only different configurations will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (b), in the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment, the center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 is set to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating body 6313. .. Therefore, by changing the rotation position (phase) of the rotating body 6313, the center of gravity position G is eccentric to the left side in the front view, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), or FIG. 46 (b). As shown in, it can be eccentric to the right side of the front view. As a result, in the displacement member 6310, the position of the center of gravity of the main body portion 311 as a whole can be adjusted (shifted) to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction.

The rotating body 6313 is formed in a circular shape in front view and in a rotationally symmetric shape with its rotation center as a symmetric point, and a metal weight is arranged at an eccentric position inside to form a center of gravity. The position G is formed so as to be eccentric from the center of rotation. Therefore, in the appearance of the rotating body 6313, the player can visually recognize the position G of the center of gravity so that the position G is located at the center of rotation of the rotating body 6313.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted, and accordingly, it is arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 46 (a)). The first rack (not shown) to be formed is formed to have only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force thereof to the first rack can be omitted, and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, if the movable mechanism (structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 6311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction because it is driven on one side, the displacement member 6310 The above-mentioned displacement when ascending and descending cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by rotating the rotating body 6313 and adjusting the center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 in the left-right direction, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 311 as a whole is set closer to the center of the displacement member 311 in the longitudinal direction. It can be biased (moved) to one side or the other side (that is, the driving side or the driven side).

Therefore, when the displacement member 6310 is stopped, the rotating body 6313 is rotated to produce an effect, while when the displacement member 6310 is displaced (up or down), the rotating body 6313 is set to a predetermined rotation position (phase). By arranging and eccentric the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 311 as a whole, the weight acting on the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction can be adjusted to absorb the above-mentioned deviation. An easy state can be formed.

Here, if the displacement direction (up or down) of the displacement member 6310 is different, the influence of gravity is changed, so that the state required for each movable mechanism is changed. That is, for example, focusing on the driven side, the state of being guided along the guide rod P changes between the ascending time when the displacement is against gravity and the descending time when the displacement is assisted by gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), for example, when the displacement member 6310 is raised, the drive side (one side in the longitudinal direction, the left side in FIG. 46 (a)). The center of gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism of the above, while the center of gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism on the driven side (other side in the longitudinal direction, right side in FIG. 46B) when the displacement member 6310 is lowered. As a result, the weight acting on the movable mechanism on the driving side and the movable mechanism on the driven side can be adjusted according to the displacement direction (up or down) of the displacement member 6310, and the above-mentioned deviation can be more easily absorbed. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 6310 even if the movable mechanism is driven on one side and the form of the movable mechanism is the same on one side in the longitudinal direction and the other side, so that the drive motor can be formed. It is possible to prevent the load of 341 from becoming excessive and the displacement member 6310 from stopping.

The center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 does not need to be maintained at a fixed position while the displacement member 6310 is displaced (up or down), and the center of gravity position G may be adjusted during the displacement. For example, when the displacement member 6310 is started to be driven by the drive motor 431 and from the start to a predetermined period, the center of gravity position G is brought close to (or separated from) the drive side (one end side in the longitudinal direction, left side in FIG. 46 (a)). On the other hand, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of driving the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431, the center of gravity position G is brought closer to (or separated from) the driven side (the other end side in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 46 (a)). ) Morphology is illustrated.

Further, the center of gravity position G adjusted by the rotation of the rotating body 6313 is not limited to the positions shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b) (left or right in front view), and is not limited to any position (phase). ) Can be set.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. 47 and 48 are front views of the vertical slide unit 7300 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 47 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 48 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged in the descending position.

In the first embodiment, the case where the movable mechanism (structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 311) is always effective has been described, but in the seventh embodiment, the movable mechanism can be fixed. (The relative displacement of the end side portion 314 with respect to the main body portion 311 can be regulated). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in the vertical slide unit 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD are arranged in front of the front base 333 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD fix a movable mechanism (a structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position, and the main body. It is a structure for regulating the relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329, and the regulating mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU are arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the ascending position. The regulating mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD are arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the descending position.

The regulatory mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD arranged at these four locations have substantially the same configuration except that they are arranged symmetrically or vertically symmetrically with each other. Therefore, the one-side member 320L The regulation mechanism 7640LU arranged above the above will be described as a typical example, and the description of the other regulation mechanisms 7640LD, 7640RU, 7640RD will be omitted.

The regulating mechanism 7640LU includes an arm body 764 that is rotatably arranged on the front base 333, a torsion spring 7642 that applies an urging force for rotating the arm body 7641, and an urging force that is applied from the torsion spring 7642. It is formed with a holding body (not shown) for restricting the rotation of the arm body 7641 and holding it in the initial position.

A roller 7641a is rotatably supported at the tip of the arm body 7641. The torsion spring 7642 urges the arm body 764 in the rotation direction (clockwise (clockwise) in the regulation mechanism 7640LU of FIGS. 47 and 48) at which the tip (roller 7641a) of the arm body 7642 is separated from the main body 311 of the displacement member 310. .. The holding body regulates the rotation of the arm body 7641 by the urging force of the torsion spring 7542, and sets the arm body 7641 in the initial position (the direction connecting the rotation center of the arm body 7641 and the rotation center of the roller 7641a with respect to the front base 333). The posture along the longitudinal direction of the above, and the posture shown in FIG. 48 in the regulation mechanism 7640LU) are held.

A decorative portion is formed on the main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 along the upper and lower side edges thereof, and a roller receiving portion 7311e is provided on the one-side member 320L at the longitudinal end portion of the decorative portion. It is formed so as to project to the front side of the front base 311 in the above.

The roller receiving portion 7311e projects to a position where it overlaps the roller 7641a of the arm body 7641 in the vertical direction (vertical direction of FIGS. 47 and 48), and the side surface of the arm body 7641 facing the side surface approaches the regulation mechanism 7640. It is formed so as to be inclined (in the regulation mechanism 7640LU of FIG. 47, it is inclined upward from its base end to its tip). Further, at the base end of the side surface facing the arm body 7641, a curved surface that can be curved so as to come into contact with the outer circumference of the roller 7641a is formed, and the roller 7641a is held by this curved surface.

When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the ascending position shown in FIG. 47 and approaches the descending position, the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 (lower side surface of FIG. When the displacement member 310 is further lowered, the roller 7641a is rolled along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 so that the arm body 7641 is gradually tilted from the initial position and displaced. When the member 310 is arranged in the lowered position, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (curved surface of the base end) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 as shown in FIG.

As a result, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched from the left and right by both arm bodies 7641 of the left and right regulation mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD, so that the movable mechanism is fixed and the main body 311 is moved in the left-right direction with respect to the end side 314. (That is, the slide displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is regulated.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 48 and approaches the raised position, the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 (upper side surface of FIG. When the displacement member 310 is further raised by being brought into contact with the roller 7641a, the roller 7641a is rolled along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 so that the arm body 7641 is gradually tilted from the initial position. When the displacement member 310 is arranged in the raised position, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (curved surface of the base end) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 as shown in FIG. 47.

As a result, as in the case described above, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched from the left and right by both arm bodies 7641 of the left and right regulation mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU, whereby the movable mechanism is fixed and the end of the main body 311 is fixed. The relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the side portion 314 (that is, the slide displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is regulated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD to regulate the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314, so that rattling and wobbling are suppressed. Then, the rotating body 313 can be rotated.

That is, the rotating body 313 is held by the main body 311 while the main body 311 is connected by a movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the end side 314, so that when the rotating body 313 rotates, it is connected. , The rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 occurs, and not only the rotation of the rotating body 313 is hindered, but also the moving part may be worn or damaged due to the rattling or wobbling.

On the other hand, since the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), the rotating body 313 is displaced in a stable state while suppressing the rattling and wobbling of the main body 311. be able to. As a result, wear and breakage of moving parts can be suppressed. In particular, when the center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric to the center of rotation as in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 46), the configuration of the present embodiment is effective.

Further, in the present embodiment, the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD act on the arm body 4671 by displacement of the displacement member 310 to the end of the displacement (up position or down position), and the movable mechanism is fixed. To form. That is, since the movable mechanism is fixed (the arm body 7641 is tilted) by utilizing the displacement (upward and downward) of the displacement member 310, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for fixing the movable mechanism, and the displacement member. The drive motor 341 for displacing (raising and lowering) the 310 can also be used as a driving means for operating the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the ascending position shown in FIG. 47, the arm body 7641 of the upper regulating mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU is automatically returned to the initial position by the urging force of the torsion spring 7642 ( Similarly, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the lowering position shown in FIG. 48, the lower regulating mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD have their arm bodies 7641 in the initial position due to the urging force of the torsion spring 7642. Is automatically restored to (see FIG. 47). That is, the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD can be automatically returned to the position (initial position) shielded by the front base 333 so as to be invisible to the player.

Further, since the roller receiving portion 7311e is formed as a part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 (that is, a part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 is formed by the roller portion 7311e), the arm body 7641 is tilted. It is possible to make the mechanical part for the purpose inconspicuous to the player.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. 49 and 50 are front views of the vertical slide unit 8300 according to the eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 49 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 50 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged in the descending position. Further, in FIGS. 49 and 50, a state in which the front base 333 is removed from the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R is shown.

In the seventh embodiment, a case where the arm bodies 7641 of the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD sandwich the main body 311 from the left and right to fix the movable mechanism (regulate the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side 314) will be described. However, the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD of the eighth embodiment fix the movable mechanism by inserting the insertion portion 8642 between the main body portion 311 and the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the end side portion 314 (these are fixed. The relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side 314 is regulated). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, in the vertical slide unit 8300 according to the eighth embodiment, the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD are arranged in front of the intermediate base 332 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD fix a movable mechanism (a structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position, and the main body. It is a structure for regulating the relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329, and the regulating mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU are arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the ascending position. The regulating mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD are arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the descending position.

Although the regulatory mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD arranged at these four locations differ in shape, the configuration and their actions for being inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are substantially the same. Therefore, the regulation mechanism 8640LU arranged above the one-side member 320L will be described as a representative example, and the description of the other regulation mechanisms 8640LD, 8640RU, 8640RD will be omitted.

The regulation mechanism 8640LU projects from the base portion 8641 projecting from the front of the intermediate base 332 and the projecting tip of the base portion 8641 toward the displacement member 310 (in the regulation mechanism 8640LU, toward the lower side in FIG. 49). It is provided with an insertion portion 8642. That is, the insertion portion 8642 is raised by the base portion 8641 up to a height position facing the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b, and between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 49 and 50). It is placed at a position that overlaps with. The plate thickness of the insertion portion 8642 is set to a dimension equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b.

When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the ascending position shown in FIG. 49 and then approaches the descending position, the restricting mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD are inserted below the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314. When the portions 8642 are faced with each other and the displacement member 310 is further lowered and placed in the lowered position, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b facing each other, as shown in FIG.

As a result, in the displacement member 310, the space between the stopper surface 311b of the main body 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side 314 (gap for relative displacement) is filled by the insertion portion 8642 of the regulation mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD. Therefore, the movable mechanism is fixed, and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 in the left-right direction (that is, the slide displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is regulated. NS.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. When the portions 8642 face each other, the displacement member 310 is further raised, and the displacement member 310 is placed in the raised position, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b facing each other, as shown in FIG. 49.

As a result, in the displacement member 310, the gap between the stopper surface 311b of the main body 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side 314 (gap for relative displacement) of the displacement member 310 is the regulation mechanism 8640LU, 8640RU. By being filled with the insertion portion 8642, the movable mechanism is fixed, and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 in the left-right direction (that is, the protrusion pin 311a along the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314). Slide displacement) is regulated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD to regulate the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314, so that rattling and wobbling are suppressed. Then, the rotating body 313 can be rotated.

That is, the rotating body 313 is held by the main body 311 while the main body 311 is connected by a movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the end side 314, so that when the rotating body 313 rotates, it is connected. , The rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 occurs, and not only the rotation of the rotating body 313 is hindered, but also the moving part may be worn or damaged due to the rattling or wobbling.

On the other hand, since the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), the rotating body 313 is displaced in a stable state while suppressing the rattling and wobbling of the main body 311. be able to. As a result, wear and breakage of moving parts can be suppressed. In particular, when the center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric to the center of rotation as in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 46), the configuration of the present embodiment is effective.

Further, in the present embodiment, the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD insert the insertion portion 8642 between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b by displacement of the displacement member 310 to the displacement end (up position or lower position) thereof. The movable mechanism is fixed. That is, since the movable mechanism is fixed by utilizing the displacement (up and down) of the displacement member 310 (the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b), the driving means for fixing the movable mechanism. The drive motor 341 for displacementing (raising and lowering) the displacement member 310 can also be used as a driving means for operating the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. 51 and 52 are front views of the transmission mechanism and the back base 9331 according to the ninth embodiment, FIG. 51 corresponds to the state of FIG. 22, and FIG. 52 corresponds to the state of FIG. 24, respectively.

In the first embodiment, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (tilted) with respect to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364, so that the second rack is tilted. Although the violence of the posture of 364 was suppressed, in the second rack 364 of the ninth embodiment, the magnetic force of the magnets 9652a to 9652e is applied in a direction that is non-parallel (tilted) with respect to the direction of the linear motion. So, the violence of the posture is suppressed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, as in the case of the first embodiment, the back base 9331 has a vertically long main body portion and an overhang extending laterally from the lower end of the main body portion. It is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view from the portion, and a metal rod 9651 is arranged on the side of the main body portion (the overhanging direction side of the overhanging portion). The metal rod 9651 is a metal rod-shaped body, and is arranged in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the linear motion direction of the second rack 364.

In the second rack 364, a plurality of magnets 9652a to 9652e are respectively arranged on the side facing the metal rod 9651 arranged on the back base 9331, and the metal rod 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e are arranged. It is formed to be attracted by magnetic force. That is, a magnetic force is applied (acted) to the second rack 364 in a direction in which the lower end side thereof is urged toward the side opposite to the second pinion 365a (left side in FIG. 51).

Therefore, as in the case of the first embodiment, the tooth surface of the second rack 364 can be brought close to the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a, so that the gap between these tooth surfaces can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag when transmitting the driving force from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth surfaces, and it is possible to improve the responsiveness. In addition, it is possible to prevent the tooth surfaces from being worn or damaged due to the collision between the tooth surfaces immediately after the driving force from the stopped state is transmitted (initially in meshing). Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be closed, so that the meshing state of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

In the first embodiment in which the urging spring 366 is formed as a coil spring, deterioration (sagging) occurs with the repeated operation of the second rack 364, and the urging force is changed. For example, since the magnetic force of the magnet is used for the urging force applied to the second rack 364, a stable urging force can be applied to the second rack 364 for a long period of time.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the magnets 9652a to 9652e, when the second rack 364 is located at the lowermost position of the movable range as shown in FIG. 51, all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651. On the other hand, when the second rack 364 is located at the uppermost position of the movable range as shown in FIG. 52, all the magnets 9652a to 9652e are retracted to a position where they do not face the metal rod 9651.

Therefore, the period during which the second rack 364 rises from the state of being located at the lowermost position of the movable range shown in FIG. In the "1 period"), since all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651, a constant magnetic force can be applied to the second rack 364.

The period during which the second rack 364 rises from the first position to the second position (the position where the facing of the tail magnet 9652e and the metal rod 9651 is interrupted) (hereinafter referred to as the "second period") is the period of the second rack 364. Since the number (area) of the magnets 9652a to 9652e facing the metal rod 9651 is gradually reduced with the displacement (rising), the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be gradually reduced.

During the period in which the second rack 364 rises from the second position to the position at which the uppermost position of the movable range shown in FIG. 52 (hereinafter referred to as the "third period"), all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651. Therefore, it is possible to form a state in which almost no magnetic force is applied to the second rack 364.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be applied while being adjusted to a size suitable for the state of the second rack 364. Specifically, in the first period in which the second pinion 365a is started to be driven by the second rack 364, a larger magnetic force (magnetic force exceeding the reference value) is applied to the second rack 364 to provide the second rack 364. It makes it difficult to rattle and suppresses the occurrence of violence in its posture (stabilizes the transmission of the driving force to the second pinion 365a), while driving the second pinion 365a by the second rack 364 starts. In the third period after entering the stable state, the magnetic force is driven by the second rack 364 by reducing the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 (making it equal to or less than the reference value) or by setting the magnetic force to not be applied. It is possible to reduce the resistance of the drive motor 341 and suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 341.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the second period is provided between the first period and the third period, it is possible to avoid a sudden change (decrease) in the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 and gradually. Since it can be reduced, the transition from the first period to the third period can be smoothly performed, and the posture of the second rack 364 can be stabilized.

The arrangement target (rear base 331, second rack 364) of the metal rod 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e may be reversed. Further, a magnet may be arranged instead of the metal rod 9651. When the magnets are arranged, the magnetic force in the attractive direction may be used, or the magnetic force in the repulsive direction may be used. These also provide the same effects as in the case of the present embodiment.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L according to the tenth embodiment, and shows an exploded state. Further, FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are rear perspective views of the other side member 320L, and the assembled state is shown. Note that in FIGS. 53 and 54, the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 are not shown. Further, FIG. 54A shows a state before the roller 10567 is mounted.

In the first embodiment, the case where one end of the urging spring 366 and the locking portion of the second rack 364 are locked after the back base 331 is laid on the intermediate base 332 has been described, but the tenth embodiment has been described. One end of the urging spring 366 in the embodiment is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 before lining the back base 331 on the intermediate base 332. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the tenth embodiment, the front view substantially J-shaped slit portion 10331e extends to the rear base 10331 at the portion where the extension lines of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d intersect with each other. Will be set up. The slit portion 10331e is folded back in a U shape at the end of a portion (first guide portion) extending linearly as a groove having a constant width, starting from a portion opened at the side edge of the back base 10331. It is formed as a slit whose end is the end of a linearly extended portion (second guide portion).

The height of the side wall of the intermediate base 10332 is lowered on the inner side of the bent portion (the portion where the main body portion and the overhanging portion intersect) as compared with the case of the first embodiment, and the intermediate base 10332 is attached in the assembly process. Interference with the force spring 366 is suppressed.

The rollers 10367 are formed in a disk shape and are arranged so as to face each other at predetermined intervals, respectively, the first flange portion 10667a, the second flange portion 10567b and the third flange portion 10367c, and the first flange portion 10567a and the second flange. A columnar shaft portion 10367d connecting between the portions 10367b and a columnar contact portion 10367e connecting between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c are provided, and these portions 10367a to 10367e are concentric with each other. It is formed integrally in the same posture.

The shaft portion 10637d is a portion that is inserted into the slit portion 10331e of the back base 10331 and is rotatably held (shaft-supported) at the end of the slit portion 10331e, and its outer diameter is equivalent to the groove width of the slit portion 10331e. Or it is set to a slightly smaller size. The contact portion 10367e is a portion that forms a bent posture of the urging spring 366 by bringing its outer peripheral surface into contact between one end and the other end of the urging spring 366.

The facing distance between the first flange portion 10637a and the second flange portion 10637b is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the plate thickness of the back base 10331, and the facing distance between the second flange portion 10637b and the third flange portion 10567c is urged. The dimensions are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the spring 366. Therefore, as will be described later, when the shaft portion 10637 is inserted into the slit portion 10331e, the back surface base 10331 is sandwiched between the first flange portion 10637a and the second flange portion 10637b facing each other, and the roller 10567 is moved in the axial direction. Movement is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 53, in assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 in the tenth embodiment, the drive motor 341 is mounted on the front surface of the intermediate base 10332 as in the case of the first embodiment. After mounting the gears 362a to 362e on the gear shafts 332c to 332g, the crank gear 363 on the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 on the gear shaft 332i on the back surface of the intermediate base 332 (about the gear shafts 332c to 332i). The second rack 364 is arranged in a state where the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted into the rack groove 364b and is meshed with the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365.

Next, in the tenth embodiment, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, and the other end is to the locking portion formed at the overhanging tip of the overhanging portion of the intermediate base 332. Lock. In this case, in the present embodiment, the urging spring 366 is set to be in a no-load state (a state in which the free length is maintained), so that both ends of the urging spring 366 are locked. However, such a state can be stably maintained.

After forming the state in which the transmission mechanism is attached to the intermediate base 10332 (the state shown in FIG. 53) in this way, the front surface of the back base 10331 faces the back surface of the intermediate base 10332, and both are fastened and fixed (FIG. FIG. 54 (a)) Finally, by mounting the roller 10567 on the slit portion 10331e of the back base 10331 (see FIG. 54 (b)), the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 is completed. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the back base 10331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 10332, it is erected between the bent portions (between the main body portion and the overhanging portion) of both. Since the urging spring 366 is projected, the urging spring 366 is sandwiched between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c of the roller 10367, and the shaft portion 10637d of the roller 10637 is inserted into the slit portion 10331 of the back base 10331. The roller 10567 is pushed through the opening (starting end) of the slit portion 10331 to the folded portion of the slit portion 10331. As a result, the urging spring 366 is extended and is in a bent posture. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the roller 10637 is pressed against the end of the slit portion 10331e by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 to hold it. can do.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the urging spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture by displacing the roller 10567 while abutting it between one end and the other end of the urging spring 366. This makes it easy to assemble the urging spring 366. That is, the urging spring 366 is in a bent posture while the rear base 10331 is laid over the intermediate base 10332 (that is, the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the rear base 10331). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the urging spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. As a result, the work of assembling the urging spring 366 in the bent posture can be easily performed, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 can be used not only as the urging force of the second rack 364 but also as the holding force for holding the roller 10637. It is not necessary to separately prepare a member (for example, a fastening screw) and perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and the assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the roller 10567 is rotatably held by the shaft portion 10567d being pressed against the end of the slit portion 10331e by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366. Therefore, it is not necessary to project a shaft-shaped body for rotatably supporting the roller 10567 from the back base 10331 or the intermediate base 10332. Therefore, it is not necessary to cover the back base 10331 on the intermediate base 10332 while inserting the shaft-shaped body through the roller 10567 (see FIG. 28), so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved from this point as well. ..

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 11300 according to the eleventh embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the second rack 364 of the one side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 320R are urged by different urging springs 366 has been described. The second rack 364 of the side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R are urged by the urging spring 11366 of 1. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55, one end of the vertical slide unit 11300 according to the eleventh embodiment is locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L, and the other end is locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. The urging spring 11366 is provided. The urging spring 11366 is arranged in a symmetrical posture when the roller 11661 is brought into contact with the central position between one end and the other end.

The overhanging tips of the one-side member 11320L and the other-side member 11320R are recessed, and the urging spring 11366 is erected on the intervention member 11370 through the recessed portion. .. Further, the roller 1161 is rotatably arranged on the intermediate member 11370, and the intermediate member 11370 is positioned so that the lower portion on which the urging spring 11366 is erected is recessed on the front side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 55). The urging spring 11366 is formed as a flat surface to be formed, and the urging spring 11366 can be arranged in a posture along one plane (a surface parallel to the paper surface in FIG. 55) as a whole from one end to the other end.

Here, in the first embodiment, the second rack 364 of the one side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 320R are urged by different urging springs 366 (see FIG. 15). Due to individual differences in the urging springs 366 of the book (variations in characteristics due to dimensions, materials, etc.), the magnitude of the urging force applied to each second rack 364 varies. This causes variations in the postures of the second racks 364 and affects the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism. This causes a difference (displacement) between the guidance and driving of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 320R. As described above, such a displacement makes it difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310, increases the load on each drive motor 341, and also causes the displacement member 310 to stop.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one end of the urging spring 11366 is locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L, and the other end is locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. That is, since it is urged by one urging spring 11366, the urging force applied to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R can be made uniform. .. As a result, the variation in posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed, and the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform. Therefore, the displacement member 310 can be guided and driven by the one-side member 11320L. , The guidance and drive of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 11320R can be made uniform, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

As for the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 in the eleventh embodiment, one end and the other end of the urging spring 11366 are locked to the second rack 364 as in the case of the first embodiment. A transmission mechanism is attached to the intermediate base 332 (see FIG. 28), and the rear base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332, and between the one-side member 11320L and the other-side member 11320R. An interposition member 11370 is interposed, and then one end and the other end of the urging spring 11366 are locked to the locking portions of the second racks 364 via the first opening 331c of each back base 331. , Can be implemented. That is, also in the present embodiment, the urging spring 11366 can be easily arranged in a bent posture while suppressing the urging spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off, and the assembly thereof. Work efficiency can be improved.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 and 57 are rear views of the vertical slide unit 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment. In FIG. 56, the state before the interposition member 12370 is interposed between the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R, and in FIG. 57, the interposition member 12370 is between the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R. The state after the interposition is shown in each figure.

In the first embodiment, the case where the intermediate member 370 is fastened and fixed to the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R with screws via the connecting plate 371 has been described, but the intermediate member 370 of the twelfth embodiment is described. It is fixed to the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R by the urging force of the urging spring 12366. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the vertical slide unit 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment, the engaged portion 12331f is recessed on the facing surface side of the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R, and each of them is engaged. Engagement portions 12372 that can be engaged with the portion 12331f are projected from both ends of the interposition member 12370. The engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in the rear view.

Further, a locking portion 12373 for locking the other end of the urging spring 366 is formed on the back surface of the intermediate member 12370, and the overhanging tip of the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R is formed. , And the other end of the urging spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposing member 12370 through the recessed portion.

The interposition member 12370 is formed as a flat surface in which the region from the locking portion 12373 to the side edge is recessed on the front side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 56), whereby the urging spring 366 is formed from one end thereof. It can be arranged in a posture along one plane (a plane parallel to the paper surface of FIG. 56) as a whole up to the other end.

The assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment is performed as follows. First, the transmission mechanism is assembled to the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332, and the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R are assembled. In this case, contrary to the case of the first embodiment, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, while the other end is unlocked, and the transmission mechanism is attached. The back base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332 in the closed state (see FIG. 28).

As a result, the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R are formed in the state shown in FIG. 56. Next, the engaging portion 12372 of the intermediate member 12370 is engaged with the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R. While engaging with the portion 12331f, an interposition member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R, and finally, each urging spring 366 is interposed through the first opening 331c of each back surface base 331. The other end of the is locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposing member 12370, respectively. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57, the assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 is completed.

According to the present embodiment, the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 are placed between the intermediate base 332 and the rear base 331 facing each other (that is, the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the rear base 331. Since the other end of the urging spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the intermediate member 12370, it is possible to prevent the urging spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. While doing so, the urging spring 366 can be arranged in a bent posture, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, each urging spring 366 is arranged so as to be inclined downward from the roller 367 (see FIG. 19) toward the locked portion 12373 of the intermediate member 2370. Since it is installed, the force component in the direction of pulling the intermediate member 12370 toward the left and right (one side member 320L side and the other side member 320R side) and the direction of pushing up the intermediate member 12370 upward (displacement member 310 side). The force component can act on such an interposition member 12370.

As a result, the engaging portion 12372 of the intermediate member 12370 is pressed against the engaged portion 12331f of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R by the urging force of the urging spring 366, so that the one-side member 320L and the other-side member The state in which the interposition member 12370 is interposed between the 320Rs can be maintained. As a result, the intermediate member 12370 is held by the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R (that is, at least the intermediate member 12370 is temporarily fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210. Can be fixed). Therefore, the vertical slide unit 12300 can be easily handled until it is attached to the rear case 210, and workability in the transfer process and the attachment process can be improved.

Further, the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed in a substantially L-shape in the rear view, and the one-side member 12320L, the other-side member 12320R, and the interposing member 12370 are the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion. Since they are connected by the engagement of 12331f, it is possible to prevent the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R from being deformed in a "H" shape when viewed from the front with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, also in this respect, the vertical slide unit 12300 can be easily handled until it is attached to the rear case 210, and workability in the transport process and the attachment process can be improved.

Further, the urging force of the urging spring 363 is not only applied to the second rack 364, but also used as a fixing force for fixing to the intermediate member 12370 between the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R. , A member for fixing to the intermediate member 12370 to the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R (for example, a connecting shaft 332 m, a connecting plate 371 and a screw for fastening them) can be eliminated, and the number of parts and assembly can be increased accordingly. Man-hours can be reduced.

The engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are engaged with each other in a state of having a predetermined rattling due to the dimensional tolerance. That is, since the relative displacement of the intermediate member 12370 with respect to the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R can be allowed due to the rattling, when the upper and lower slide unit 12300 is attached to the bottom plate portion 211 of the back case 210, The mounting positions of the one-side member 12320L, the other-side member 12320R, and the interposition member 12370 can be individually adjusted, and the workability at the time of mounting can be improved.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 (a) is a rear view perspective view of the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 58 (b) and 58 (c) schematically show a mode of changing the posture of the urging spring 366. It is a back schematic view of the other side member 13320R shown.

In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement position of the roller 367 for setting the urging spring 366 in a bent posture is fixed at a predetermined position has been described, but the roller 10367 in the thirteenth embodiment has the arrangement position. Is changed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment has the same other configuration as the other side member 10320R in the tenth embodiment except that the telescopic actuator 13671 is added. Therefore, the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the telescopic actuator 13671 is arranged on the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment. The telescopic actuator 13671 is a drive mechanism (shown) for advancing or retracting (extending or shortening) the main body portion 13671a, the rod portion 13671b held by the main body portion 13671a, and the rod portion 13671b with respect to the main body portion 13671a. The main body portion 13671a is fixed to the back surface of the back surface base 331, and the roller 10367 is rotatably connected to the tip of the rod portion 13671b.

In this case, the telescopic actuator 13671 is arranged in a posture in which the telescopic direction (axial direction of the rod portion 13671b) is along the straight line portion from the folded portion to the end of the slit portion 10331e. Therefore, by driving the telescopic actuator 13671 to expand and contract the rod portion 13671b, the roller 10567 is moved to the end of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. 58 (b) and the folded portion of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. 58 (c). Can be displaced between.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the position of the roller 10367 for contacting the urging spring 366 and forming the bent posture of the urging spring 366 is adjusted by the telescopic actuator 13671 to expand and contract the rod portion 13671b. It can be changed by the operation. As a result, the bent state of the urging spring 366 can be adjusted, so that the state of the urging force (for example, the magnitude of the urging and the urging direction) applied to the second rack 364 from the urging spring 366 can be adjusted, for example. , The second rack 364 can be adjusted according to the state (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position).

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the urging spring 366 is preloaded (in the assembled state, the urging spring 366 is applied. The load) can be increased to increase the apparent spring constant of the urging spring 366, while the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended to preload the urging spring 366 as shown in FIG. 58 (b). Can be reduced to reduce the apparent spring constant of the urging spring 366.

Therefore, for example, when the displacement member 310 is stopped at the ascending position, the force required for increasing the preload of the urging spring 366 and maintaining the displacement member 310 at the ascending position is applied to the urging spring 366. While assisted by the urging force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (ascended or lowered) (that is, when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the urging spring 366 is reduced to reduce the preload of the urging spring 366. It is possible to prevent the urging force from becoming a resistance when the displacement member 310 (second rack 364) is displaced.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 and the direction of the urging force applied to the second rack 364 and the second rack 364. The angle (tilt angle) formed by the direction of linear motion can be reduced (approached to be parallel), while the urging spring 366 is extended by extending the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 as shown in FIG. 58 (b). The angle (inclination angle) formed by the direction of the urging force applied to the second rack and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 can be increased.

Therefore, for example, in the initial stage in the transient state where the displacement of the second rack 364 is started, the behavior of the second rack 364 becomes unstable, so that the urging force applied to the second rack 364 from the urging spring 366 becomes unstable. The tilt angle is increased (that is, closer to the state shown in FIG. 58 (b)) to suppress the occurrence of the stance rampage of the second rack 364, while the steady state in which the displacement speed of the second rack 364 reaches a constant level. At this stage, the behavior of the second rack 364 is stabilized, so the inclination angle of the urging force applied to the second rack 364 from the urging spring 366 is reduced (closer to parallel) to reduce the resistance. As a result, the energy required to drive the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300 in the 14th embodiment, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300. Note that FIG. 59A shows a state in which the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, and FIG. 59B shows a state in which the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the posture of the urging spring 11366 is maintained constant has been described, but the posture of the urging spring 11366 in the thirteenth embodiment is changed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The vertical slide unit 14300 in the 14th embodiment has a point that the telescopic actuator 13671 and the left and right rollers 14662 are added to the vertical slide unit 11300 in the 11th embodiment, and the roller 11661 is the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671b. The other configurations are the same except that it is disposed at the tip of the. Therefore, the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the vertical slide unit 14300 according to the 14th embodiment is provided with the telescopic actuator 13671 and the left and right rollers 14662.

The telescopic actuator 13671 is arranged at the center of the urging spring 11366 in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 59A) in the rear view shown in FIG. ) Is arranged in a vertical direction (that is, a posture along the symmetric line of the urging spring 11366) along the vertical direction (FIG. 59 (a) vertical direction).

Further, in the present embodiment, the roller 11661 is rotatably arranged at the tip of the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671, while the left and right rollers 14662 are rotatably arranged on the back surface of the interposition member 11370.

Therefore, by driving the telescopic actuator 13671 to expand and contract the rod portion 13671b, the roller 11661 is aligned with the left and right rollers 14662 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 59 (a)) as shown in FIG. 59 (a). And, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), it can be displaced between the position and the position below the left and right rollers 14662 (lower side in FIG. 59 (a)).

In the state shown in FIG. 59 (a) in which the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, the urging spring 11366 extends from the left and right bent portions (roller 367, see FIG. 19) to the contact portion with the roller 11661. The spaces are formed in a straight line.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the roller 11661 that comes into contact with the urging spring 11366 can be changed by the expansion / contraction operation of the rod portion 13671b by the expansion / contraction actuator 13671. The state of the urging force applied to the second rack 364 (for example, the magnitude of the urging) is determined according to, for example, the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). Can be adjusted.

As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), by extending the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the preload of the urging spring 11366 (the load applied to the urging spring 11366 in the assembled state). The apparent spring constant of the urging spring 11366 can be increased, while the preload of the urging spring 11366 is reduced by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 as shown in FIG. 59 (a). Therefore, the apparent spring constant of the urging spring 11366 can be reduced.

Therefore, for example, when the displacement member 310 is stopped at the ascending position, the force required for increasing the preload of the urging spring 366 and maintaining the displacement member 310 at the ascending position is applied to the urging spring 366. While assisted by the urging force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (ascended or lowered) (that is, when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the urging spring 366 is reduced to reduce the preload of the urging spring 366. It is possible to prevent the urging force from becoming a resistance when the displacement member 310 (second rack 364) is displaced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the preload of one urging spring 11366 can be adjusted, so that the change in the urging force due to such adjustment can be adjusted to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R. It can be made uniform with the second rack 364 of. As a result, the variation in posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed, and the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform. Therefore, the displacement member 310 can be guided and driven by the one-side member 11320L. , The guidance and drive of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 11320R can be made uniform, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the angle (inclination angle) formed by the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 11366 to each of the second racks 364 and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 is not changed. Only the preload of the urging spring 11366 can be adjusted (while maintaining a constant tilt angle). As a result, when adjusting the preload of the urging spring 11366, the inclination angle (direction in which the urging force is applied) is changed along with the adjustment, and the posture of the second rack 364 is caused by the change in the inclination angle. Can be avoided from rampaging.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base 15331 according to the fifteenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 22.

In the first embodiment, the gear shaft 331b arranged to face the second pinion 365a is inserted into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is placed on the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. Although the case where the displacement is possible along the same direction has been described, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first regulating portion 15331g arranged facing the second pinion 365a is brought into contact with the side surface of the second rack 15364. The second rack 15364 is placed in a displaceable state along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 60, the second rack 15364 of the transmission mechanism in the fifteenth embodiment has a side surface on the side where the rack is formed (side surface on the second pinion 365a side) and a side opposite to the side surface (left side in FIG. 60). ) Are formed as flat surfaces parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack. Specifically, the side surfaces of the second rack 15364 are formed as flat surfaces parallel to each other, at least as long as the first regulating portion 15331g and the pair of second regulating portions 15331h, which will be described later, are in contact with each other.

From the front of the back base 15331, a first regulation unit 15331g and a pair of left and right second regulation units 15331h are projected. The first regulating portion 15331g is a portion for abutting the side surface (the surface on the left side of FIG. 60) of the second rack 15364 to define its posture, and faces the axis of the second pinion 365a with the second rack 15364 sandwiched therein. It is arranged at a position (a position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 in the assembled state of the back surface base 15331 and the intermediate base 332) and is formed as a columnar body having a circular cross section. Specifically, the arrangement position of the first regulating portion 15331g is a position in which the direction connecting the axis of the first regulating section 15331g and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is orthogonal to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 15364. Is set to.

The second regulating portion 15331h is a portion for restricting the displacement of the second rack 15364 in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 60), and a pair is formed at predetermined intervals and a columnar column having a circular cross section is formed. Formed as a body. The facing distance between the pair of second regulating portions 15331h (distance in the left-right direction in FIG. 60) is made larger than the width dimension of the second rack 15364, and is formed so as to have a gap between the pair and the side surface of the second rack 15364.

In this case, the amount of displacement of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 60) allowed by the second regulation unit 15331h is allowed between the first regulation unit 15331g and the second pinion 365a. It is made larger than the amount of displacement of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction). The difference in the allowable displacement amount is preferably set to 1.5 times or more. This is because the displacement (rotation) of the second rack 15364 along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a can be reliably formed.

From the above configuration, according to the present embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, the second rack 15364 is displaced (rotated) along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a in the direction of linear motion. It can be displaced (see FIG. 26). As a result, even if the posture of the second rack 15364 is disturbed, it is easy to maintain the engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a to be constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, unlike the case of the first embodiment, it is not necessary to form an opening of the rack groove 3644b (see FIG. 22) in the second rack 15364. Rigidity can be ensured and its durability can be improved. Further, since the rack groove 3644b can be omitted and the rigidity of the second rack 15364 is ensured, the deformation of the second rack 15364 when driven by the rotation of the second pinion 365a can be suppressed. From the point of view, it is possible to easily maintain the meshing between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a at a constant level.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. 61 and 62 are front views of the transmission mechanism and the back base 15331 according to the 16th embodiment, and correspond to FIGS. 22 and 24, respectively.

In the first embodiment, the case where the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 is formed with a constant groove width along the longitudinal direction thereof has been described, but the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 in the 16th embodiment has been described. By recessing the recess 16681, the groove width is expanded in a part in the longitudinal direction thereof. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the second rack 16364 of the transmission mechanism according to the 16th embodiment has a recess 16681 on the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 635a side (right side of FIGS. 61 and 62). It is recessed. The recess 16681 is a portion for regulating the linear motion of the second rack 16364, and is formed as an arc-shaped curved recess that can be engaged with the rack shaft 331b at two locations, the upper end and the lower end of the guide groove 364a. NS. The inner diameter of the recess 16681 is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rack shaft 331b.

The central angle of the arc of the recess 16681 is preferably set within a range of 30 ° or more and 120 ° or less, and more preferably within a range of 45 ° or more and 90 ° or less. This is to achieve the contradictory functions of maintaining the engaged state between the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331b and the ease of disengaging the engagement.

For example, in order to stop and hold the displacement member 310 in the ascending position (see FIG. 21A), it is necessary to resist the gravity acting on the displacement member 310, so that the drive required for the drive motor 341 is required. Power increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged in the raised position, the second rack 16364 is arranged at the lowermost part of the movable range as shown in FIG. The rack shaft 331b can be engaged with the recess 16681 at the lower end of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 to regulate the linear motion of the second rack 16364. As a result, the driving force required for the drive motor 341 can be reduced (or the drive thereof can be stopped). As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 when the displacement member 310 is held in the raised position can be suppressed.

Further, in the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged in the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 62, the second rack 16364 is arranged at the uppermost position in the movable range, so that the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 is arranged. The rack shaft 331b can be engaged with the recess 16681 at the upper end of the second rack 16364 to regulate the linear motion of the second rack 16364. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 310 arranged at the descending position from rattling due to the influence of disturbance.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the recess 16681 is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 635a side (right side of FIGS. 61 and 62) and is provided to the urging spring 366 to the second pinion 16364. Where the direction of the urging force is inclined (not parallel) with respect to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 16364, the direction of the inclination is the second rack 16364 with the rack shaft 331b as the center of rotation in FIG. 61. Since the direction is such that the rack shaft 331b is engaged with the recess 16681 by rotating it clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 62, the engagement and disengagement of the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331b are engaged with and disengaged from the second rack 16364. It can be done with a linear motion.

That is, when the second rack 16364 is displaced to the uppermost or lowermost part of the movable range, the recess 16681 faces the rack shaft 331b, and the second rack 16364 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring 366. The rack shaft 331b can be engaged (inserted) with the recess 16681, and the engagement between the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331b can be maintained by the urging force of the urging spring 366. On the other hand, when the second pinion 365a is rotationally driven from that state, the second rack 16364 is rotated in the direction of pulling out the rack shaft 331b from the recess 16681 while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 366, and becomes the recess 16681. The engagement with the rack shaft 331b is released. As a result, the second rack 16364 can be linearly moved.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mechanism (linear motion regulating means) for regulating the linear motion of the second rack 16364 is inserted into the guide groove 364a formed in the second rack 16364 and the guide groove 364a thereof. Since it is configured by using the shaft 331b, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the second rack 16364, and space efficiency can be improved. Further, in addition to the portion for rotatably guiding the second pinion 365a, the rack shaft 331b also serves as a portion constituting the linear motion regulating means (a portion engaging with the recess 16681). The number of points can be reduced to reduce the size and product cost.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body 17440L1 in the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 63 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body 17440R1 in the 7th embodiment. 63 (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ring-divided body 17440L1 on the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line of FIG. 63 (a), and FIG. 63 (d) is a circle on the LXIIId-LXIIId line of FIG. 63 (b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the ring division body 17440R1. Note that FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) correspond to FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b).

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging recess 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a are provided on the tip of the positioning convex portion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning concave portion 492 to form a two-stage positioning mechanism has been described. A ball plunger mechanism 17495 is arranged at the tip of the positioning convex portion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning concave portion 492 in the 17th embodiment. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d), the positioning mechanism in the 17th embodiment projects from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular split body 17440R1 as in the case of the 1st embodiment. The positioning convex portion 491 to be formed and the positioning concave portion 492 recessed in the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 17440L1 as a concave portion capable of receiving the positioning convex portion 491 are provided, while the concave portion of the positioning concave portion 492 is provided. A recessed portion 17493a is recessed in the bottom surface 17493, and a ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 protrudes from the protruding tip surface of the positioning convex portion 491.

The recessed portion 17493a is formed as a spherical recess, and the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 is formed so as to be engaged with each other. That is, the diameter of the spherical surface of the recess 17493a is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495. The recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recessed portion 17493a.

The recessed portion 17493a and the ball 17495a are engaged with each other (concavo-convex fitting) at the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are brought into contact with each other to perform final positioning. It is a part. The dimension of the ball 17495a protruding from the protruding tip surface of the positioning convex portion 491 is set to be smaller than the concave depth of the positioning concave portion 492.

As a result, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning with relatively coarse positioning accuracy (relatively wide allowable range of misalignment) is performed by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Therefore, while the protruding tip of the positioning convex portion 491 can be reliably received by the positioning concave portion 492 and the subsequent guidance to the proper positioning position can be smoothly performed, when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. In the final stage of the above, by engaging the ball 17495a with the recessed portion 17493a, the positioning accuracy is improved, the ring shape is properly formed, and rattling and wobbling after the ring shape is formed are surely suppressed. It is possible to perform two-step positioning.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second stage of the positioning mechanism has a structure in which the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 is engaged with the recessed portion 17493a recessed in the recessed bottom surface 17493, so that the ring is divided. In the second stage positioning when the bodies 17440L1, 17440R1 are placed in the ring formation position, the ball 17495a can be rolled on the concave bottom surface 17493, and as a result, the positioning protrusion 491 is formed in the positioning recess 492. The operation from the acceptance until the ball 17495a engages with the recessed portion 17493 can be smoothly performed, and the disengagement between the ball 17495a and the recessed portion 17493 can be disengaged from the ring-divided body 17440L1,. The movement when the 17440R1 is displaced to the retracted position can be smoothly performed.

In this case, since the recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recessed portion 17493a, the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be guided to the recessed portion 1793a along the recessed bottom surface 17493. , These balls 17495a can be reliably engaged with the recessed portion 17493a.

Further, when the ring-divided bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the ring-forming position, even if the protruding tip of the positioning convex portion 491 collides with the concave bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492, the ball plunger mechanism 17495 The ball 17495a can be brought into contact with the concave bottom surface 17493, and the spring can be elastically deformed to absorb the impact as the ball 17495a retracts.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400.

Note that FIGS. 64 and 65 correspond to the front and rear views of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in a state of being attached to the rear case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operating unit 200). Further, in FIG. 64, the vertical slide unit 18300 and the annulus forming unit 18400 are partially cut by a virtual plane passing through the center of the posture defining member 18450 in the annulus forming unit 18400 in the plate thickness direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 65). Corresponds to the cross section.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are not in contact with each other except for the attachment portion to the rear case 210 has been described, but in the eighteenth embodiment, the vertical slide unit 18300 and the vertical slide unit 18300 have been described. The ring forming unit 18400 is partially contactable. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the vertical slide unit 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has the same other configurations as the vertical slide unit 300 in the first embodiment, except that the diameter dimension of the rotation base 18312 is increased. On the other hand, the annulus forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment has a different side edge shape from the annulus forming unit 400 in the first embodiment on the side facing the rotation base 18312 of the posture defining member 18450 (rotation base). The other configurations are the same except that the holding portion 18453 is formed so as to be in contact with the outer periphery of the 18312). Hereinafter, the description of these same configurations will be omitted. The holding portion 18453 is curved in an arc shape concentric with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 in the rear view.

As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), after the vertical slide unit 18300 arranges the displacement member 310 between the ascending position and the descending position, the annulus forming unit 18400 moves the annulus divided body 440L1. When ~ 440R2 is arranged at the ring forming position, a ring shape is formed by the ring dividing bodies 440L1 to 440R2, and a circular rotating body 313 in front view is formed on the inner peripheral side of the ring shape at a predetermined interval. Arranged concentrically. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by the ring shape in this way.

In this case, since the displacement member 310 is provided with a movable mechanism (a structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 311), both ends of the main body portion 311 are end side portions 314. It will be supported in a state where it can move. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, rattling or wobbling occurs with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 due to the rotation, so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (annular split body). It collides with the inner peripheral surface of 440L1 to 440R2) and causes damage. When the center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric from the center of rotation as in the case of the sixth embodiment described above, the problem of damage due to collision becomes particularly remarkable.

On the other hand, if a gap is provided between the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 to the extent that they do not collide, the effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by the ring shape can be obtained. I can't fully demonstrate it. Further, even when the rotating body 313 does not collide with the annular shape (circular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2), rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 occurs as the rotating body 313 rotates. If continued, the moving parts (for example, the projecting pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) will be worn.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310 of the vertical slide unit 18300 is arranged between the ascending position and the descending position, and the annulus divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 of the annulus forming unit 18400 are arranged at the annulus forming position. When the rotating body 313 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the annulus shape, the pair of annulus forming units 18400 slide-displaced in the left-right direction (directions close to each other) by the hanging mechanism 450. The posture defining member 18450 abuts the holding portion 18453 on the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 of the vertical slide unit 18300, and sandwiches the rotation base 18312 from the left and right directions as shown in FIG. 65.

As a result, the main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 can be held by the ring forming unit 18400, so that the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 can be regulated (the movable mechanism is fixed). .. As a result, even if the rotating body 313 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 311 from rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, whereby the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (circle). It is possible to prevent the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2) from colliding with the inner peripheral surface and to prevent the movable portion (for example, the projecting pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) from being worn or damaged.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 of the displacement member 310 protrudes along the major axis direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 65) of the elongated hole 314a in the end side portion 314. When the setting pin 311a is formed by sliding, as described above, the pair of posture-determining members 18450 are slid and displaced in the left-right direction, and the holding portion 18453 of the pair of posture-determining members 18450 is moved up and down by the vertical slide unit 18300. As shown in FIG. 65, the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 of the above is sandwiched from the left-right direction to hold the main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 (restrict the relative displacement with the end side portion 314).

Therefore, it is possible to efficiently regulate the cause of the protrusion pin 311a being displaced along the elongated hole 314a, that is, the cause of rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311. As a result, the force required for holding the main body portion 311 (regulation of the relative displacement with respect to the end side portion 314) can be made smaller, and the above-mentioned rattling and wobbling can be reliably suppressed.

Further, in this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the posture defining member 18450 that sandwiches the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the left-right direction is supported by the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 extending along the left-right direction, so that the main body portion It is possible to increase the holding force in the direction in which the 311 is displaced relative to the end side portion 314 (horizontal direction), and from this point as well, it is possible to reliably suppress rattling and wobbling of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314. Become.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ring forming unit 18400 is provided by arranging the ring dividing bodies 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position to the ring forming position to form the ring shape and produce the effect. The relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is regulated (the movable mechanism is fixed) by utilizing the operation performed for the effect that the 18400 forms an annular shape. That is, the relative displacement can be regulated in addition to the operation for the effect, and it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism or a driving means for regulating the relative displacement. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 in the 19th embodiment.

Note that FIG. 66 corresponds to a front view and a rear view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the annulus forming unit 19400 in a state of being attached to the back case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operating unit 200). Further, FIG. 66 shows the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 partially by a virtual plane passing through the center of the ring dividing bodies 440L1 to 440R2 in the ring forming unit 19400 in the plate thickness direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 66). Corresponds to the cross-sectional view cut into.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the vertical slide unit 18300 and the annulus forming unit 18400 are brought into direct contact with each other to regulate the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 324 has been described. Then, the vertical displacement unit 19300 and the annulus forming unit 19400 are not in contact with each other, and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 324 is regulated. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the vertical slide unit 19300 in the 19th embodiment is different from the vertical slide unit 300 in the 1st embodiment except that a plurality of magnets 1991 are arranged (added) on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 313. , Other configurations are the same. On the other hand, the annulus forming unit 19400 in the 19th embodiment is the inner peripheral side of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313) with respect to the annulus forming unit 400 in the first embodiment. The other configurations are the same, except that a plurality of metal plates 1992 are arranged (added) to the. Hereinafter, the description of these same configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the 19th embodiment, the plurality of magnets (4 in the present embodiment) arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 313 are equidistant from the rotation center of the rotating body 313. Are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

On the other hand, the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) metal plates arranged on the inner peripheral side (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313) of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are made of a metal material. It is formed as a flat plate body curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape formed by the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. That is, each metal plate 1992 forms a front view ring shape concentric with the rotating body 313.

As a result, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 313 is caused by the magnetic force acting between the magnet 1991 arranged on the rotating body 313 and the metal plate 1992 arranged on the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. Can be regulated in any direction to displace in the radial direction. That is, the rotating body 313 can be held at a position (center on the inner peripheral side) concentric with the annular shape formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape (annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2). Further, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 311 from rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, whereby the movable portion (for example, the projecting pin 311a or the elongated hole 314a) can be prevented from rattling or wobbling. It can suppress wear and damage.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the metal plates 1992 are continuous over almost the entire circumference, and the magnets 1991 are arranged at intervals of 90 ° in the circumferential direction. (Arrangement), which allows the rotating body 313 to be constrained from all sides. Therefore, not only the displacement (rattling or wobbling) can be suppressed in any direction, but also the rotating body 313 with respect to the annular shape (inner peripheral surface) formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. When the relative positions of the above are deviated, the centering can be performed so that the rotating body 313 is concentrically positioned with respect to the annular shape.

Further, as in the case of the 18th embodiment, the rotating body 313 is held on the inner peripheral side of the ring shape by utilizing the operation performed for the effect that the ring forming unit 19400 forms the ring shape. (The relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is regulated), and it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism or a driving means for holding the rotating body 313 (regulating the relative displacement). Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70. 67 (a) and 68 (a) are front views of the transmission mechanism and the back base 20331 according to the twentieth embodiment, and correspond to FIGS. 22 and 24, respectively. 67 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back base 20331 in the LXVIIb-LXVIIb line of FIG. 67 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back base 20331 in the LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb line of FIG. 68 (a). It is a figure.

In the first embodiment, the case where the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 is formed as an opening has been described, but the guide groove 20364a of the second rack 20364 in the 20th embodiment is formed as a bottomed concave groove. .. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the guide groove 20364a of the second rack 20364 in the 20th embodiment has a U-shaped cross section in which the back side (the back side of the paper surface of FIGS. 67 and 68) of the second rack 20364 is opened. It is formed as a bottomed concave groove, and a recess 20681 is recessed in the bottom surface of the guide groove 20364a. On the other hand, the ball 20682 is elastically supported on the rack shaft 20331b of the back base 331 so as to be able to appear and disappear. That is, the rack shaft 20331b is formed as a ball plunger that fits the ball into the recess 20681 of the guide groove 20364a.

The recess 20681 is formed as a spherical recess that can engage with the ball 20682 of the rack shaft 20331b at two locations, the upper end and the lower end (upper and lower sides of FIGS. 67 and 68) of the guide groove 20364a. The inner diameter of the recess 20681 is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the ball 20682.

The central angle of the spherical surface of the recess 20681 is preferably set within a range of 30 ° or more and 120 ° or less, and more preferably set within a range of 45 ° or more and 90 ° or less. This is to achieve the contradictory functions of maintaining the engaged state between the recess 20681 and the ball 20682 and the ease of disengaging the engagement.

The rack shaft 20331b is arranged at a position facing the gear shaft 332i (see FIG. 18) of the intermediate base 332, as in the case of the first embodiment. Further, the diameter of the rack shaft 20331b is set to a dimension equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the first guide groove 20364a, so that the second rack 20364 can rotate around the rack shaft 20331b. Therefore, the second rack 364 can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a pivotally supported by the gear shaft 332i (see FIG. 26).

Here, in order to stop and hold the displacement member 310 at the ascending position (see FIG. 21A), it is necessary to resist the gravity acting on the displacement member 310, which is required for the drive motor 341. The driving force increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 67, the second rack 20364 is arranged at the lowermost position in the movable range, and the second rack 20364 is arranged at the lowermost position. By engaging the ball 20681 of the rack shaft 20331b with the recess 20681 at the lower end of the guide groove 20364a of the rack 20364, the linear motion of the second rack 20364 can be regulated. As a result, the driving force required for the drive motor 341 can be reduced (or the drive thereof can be stopped). As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 when the displacement member 310 is held in the raised position can be suppressed.

Similarly, in the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 21 (c)), as shown in FIG. 68, the second rack 20364 is arranged at the uppermost position in the movable range, and the second rack 20364 is arranged at the uppermost position. The linear motion of the second rack 20364 can be regulated by engaging the ball 20682 of the rack shaft 20331b with the recess 20681 at the upper end of the guide groove 20364a of the rack 20364. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 310 arranged at the descending position from rattling due to the influence of disturbance.

In the present embodiment, when the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position (see FIG. 21A or 21C), the crank gear 363 is shown in FIGS. 67 and 68. The crank gear 363 is arranged in a posture in which the direction connecting the center of rotation of the eccentric pin 363a and the axis of the eccentric pin 363a is orthogonal to the extending direction of the rack groove 364b.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, a structure for facilitating the disengagement of the recess 20681 and the ball 20682 will be described.

69 (a), 69 (b), 70 (a) and 70 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the second rack 20364 and the crank gear 363.

Note that FIG. 69 (a) shows a state in which the crank gear 363 is arranged at the first position on the ascending side, and FIG. 69 (b) shows a state in which the crank gear 363 is arranged at the second position on the ascending side. FIG. 70A shows a state in which the crank gear 363 is arranged at the first position on the descending side, and FIG. 70B shows a state in which the crank gear 363 is arranged at the second position on the descending side. In this case, in the states shown in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b), the displacement member 310 is in the ascending position, and in the states shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the displacement member 310 is in the descending position. , Each placed.

In a state where the displacement member 310 in the lowered position is raised and placed in the raised position and the ball 20681 is engaged with the recess 20681 at the lower end of the guide groove 20364a (see FIGS. 21 (a) and 67). The second rack 20364 is arranged at the uppermost position in the movable range, and the crank gear 363 is arranged at the first position on the ascending side shown in FIG. 69 (a).

From the state shown in FIG. 69 (a), when the crank gear 363 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is second. By sliding along the rack groove 20364b of the rack 20364, the second rack 364 is displaced (lowered) downward (downward in FIG. 69 (a)), and the crank gear 363 is shown in FIG. 70 (a). When the first position on the descending side is reached, the displacement member 310 is arranged in the descending position, and the ball 20682 is engaged with the recess 20681 at the lower end of the guide groove 20364a (see FIGS. 21 (c) and 68).

On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 70A, the crank gear 363 is rotated in the opposite direction (clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 70A) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, and the crank gear 363 is rotated in FIG. By returning to the first position on the ascending side shown in a), the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position, and the ball 20682 is engaged with the recess 20681 at the upper end of the guide groove 20364a (FIG. 21 (a) and FIG. See FIG. 67).

Here, in the present embodiment, the groove width of the rack groove 20364b is set as follows. That is, from the region through which the eccentric pin 363a passes when the crank gear 363 is rotated between the ascending side first position and the descending side first position (from the eccentric pin 363a in FIGS. 69A and 70A). In the area on the left side), the groove width of the rack groove 20364b is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the eccentric pin 363a. Therefore, as described above, the eccentric pin 363a slides along the rack groove 20364b as the crank gear 363 rotates, so that the second rack 20364 is moved up and down.

On the other hand, the region through which the eccentric pin 363a passes when the crank gear 363 is rotated between the ascending side first position and the ascending side second position and between the descending side first position and the descending side second position. (Region on the right side of the eccentric pin 363a in FIGS. 69A and 70A), the groove width of the rack groove 20364b is set to a dimension sufficiently larger than the diameter of the eccentric pin 363a, and the crank gear 363 is set. Even if the eccentric pin 363a is rotated, the eccentric pin 363a does not come into contact with the rack groove 20364b, and the crank gear 363 idles (idles) with respect to the second rack 20364.

That is, between the ascending first position and the ascending second position (between the state of FIG. 69A and the state of FIG. 69B), and between the descending side first position and the descending side second position. (Between the state of FIG. 70 (a) and the state of FIG. 70 (b)), even if the crank gear 363 is rotated, it is possible to avoid displacement of the second rack 20364, and the displacement member 310 can be moved. The state of being arranged in the ascending position or the descending position (the state in which the ball 20682 is engaged with the recess 20681 at the upper end or the lower end of the guide groove 20364a) can be maintained.

Therefore, from the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position and the ball 20682 is engaged with the recess 20681 at the upper end of the guide groove 20364a (see FIGS. 21A and 67), the displacement member 310 is moved to the descending position. When lowering toward, the rotation of the crank gear 363 may be started from the ascending side second position shown in FIG. 69 (b) instead of starting from the ascending side first position shown in FIG. 69 (a). At the same time, this operation can give momentum to the rotation of the crank gear 363 during the idling (idling) of the crank gear 363 from the ascending side second position to the ascending side first position. As a result, the engagement between the recess 20681 and the ball 20682 can be smoothly disengaged. Further, it is possible to suppress the power consumption of the drive motor 341 required for disengaging the engagement.

Further, from the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged in the descending position and the ball 20682 is engaged with the recess 20681 at the lower end of the guide groove 20364a (see FIGS. 21 (c) and 68), the displacement member 310 is moved to the ascending position. When raising the crank gear 363, the rotation of the crank gear 363 is not started from the first position on the descending side shown in FIG. 70 (a), but is started from the second position on the descending side shown in FIG. 70 (b). , The same effect as in the above case can be obtained.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. 71 (a) and 72 (a) are front views of the transmission mechanism and the back base 21331 according to the 21st embodiment, and correspond to FIGS. 22 and 24, respectively. 71 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back base 21331 in the LXXIb-LXXIb line of FIG. 71 (a), and FIG. 72 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back base 21331 in the LXXIb-LXXIIb line of FIG. It is a figure.

In the first embodiment, the case where the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 is formed as an opening has been described, but the guide groove 20364a of the second rack 21364 in the 21st embodiment is formed as a bottomed concave groove. .. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the guide groove 20364a and the recess 20681 in the 20th embodiment and the rack groove 364b in the first embodiment are formed in the second rack 21364 in the 21st embodiment, respectively, and the back surface thereof. The base 21331 is provided with the ball 20681 according to the twentieth embodiment. Since these configurations are the same as those in the first and twentieth embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

The transmission mechanism (mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 341 to the first pinion 351) in the 21st embodiment has a configuration in which the path from the drive motor 341 to the crank gear 21363 is different from that in the case of the first embodiment. NS. Specifically, in the 21st embodiment, the gear trains (gears 362a to 362e) in the 1st embodiment are omitted, and the gear 21361 connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 is directly meshed with the crank gear 21363.

Here, a detailed configuration of the gear 21361 and the crank gear 21363 and a structure for facilitating the disengagement of the recess 20681 and the ball 20682 will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

73 (a) to 73 (c) are partially enlarged front views of the gear 21361 and the crank gear 21363. 73 (a) shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged between the ascending position and the descending position. (C) corresponds to a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged in the lowered position, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 73, two types of teeth (driving side first tooth 21361x and driving side second tooth 21361y) are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 21361 along the circumferential direction. Similarly, two types of teeth (driven side first tooth 21363x and driven side second tooth 21363y) are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the crank gear 21363 along the circumferential direction.

In FIG. 73, the second tooth 21361y on the driving side and the second tooth 21363y on the driven side are shown with hatches for ease of understanding.

In the present embodiment, the gear 21361 is set so that the number of teeth of the drive-side first tooth 21361x is 12 and the number of teeth of the drive-side second tooth 21361y is 3. Further, in the crank gear 21363, the number of teeth of the driven side first tooth 21363x is set to 12, and the number of teeth of the driven side second tooth 21363y is set to 6, respectively. Three driven-side second teeth 21363y are arranged on each side of the driven-side first tooth 21363x.

The driving-side first tooth 21361x is a tooth for engaging with the driven-side first tooth 21363x, and the driving-side second tooth 21361y is a tooth for engaging with the driving-side first tooth 21363y. Therefore, the pitch of the first tooth 21361x on the driving side is set to the same pitch as the pitch of the first tooth 21363x on the driven side, and the pitch of the second tooth 21361y on the driving side is set to the same pitch as the pitch of the second tooth 21363y on the driving side. It is possible.

As will be described later, the gear 21361 and the crank gear 21363 have the drive-side first tooth 21361x and the driven-side first tooth 21363x meshing with each other in a region where the ball 20682 and the recess 20681 are not fitted. In the region where at least a part of the ball 21682 is fitted into the recess 20681, the driving side second tooth 21361y and the driven side second tooth 21363y are meshed (see FIG. 73).

The tooth tip circle diameter and the tooth bottom circle diameter of the driving side first tooth 21361x are set to values larger than the tooth tip circle diameter and the tooth bottom circle diameter of the driving side second tooth 21361y, respectively. Further, the tooth width, total tooth depth and pitch of the drive side first tooth 21361x are set to values smaller than the tooth width, total tooth depth and pitch of the drive side second tooth 21361y, respectively. Therefore, in the gear 21361, the pitch circle of the drive-side first tooth 21361x is made larger than the pitch circle of the drive-side second tooth 21361y.

On the other hand, the tooth tip circle diameter and the tooth bottom circle diameter of the driven side first tooth 21363x are set to values smaller than the tooth tip circle diameter and the tooth bottom circle diameter of the driven side second tooth 21363y, respectively. Further, the tooth width, total tooth depth and pitch of the driven side first tooth 21363x are set to values smaller than the tooth width, total tooth depth and pitch of the driven side second tooth 21363y, respectively. Therefore, in the crank gear 21363, the pitch circle of the driven side first tooth 21363x is made smaller than the pitch circle of the driven side second tooth 21363y.

Therefore, the reduction ratio in the state where the driving side second tooth 21361y and the driven side second tooth 21363y are meshed is the reduction ratio in the state where the driving side first tooth 21361x and the driving side first tooth 21363x are meshed. Can be larger than. That is, the number of rotations of the crank gear 21363 per unit rotation number of the gear 21361 in the meshed state of the second tooth 21361y on the driving side and the second tooth 21363y on the driven side is the number of rotations of the first tooth 21361x on the driving side and the first tooth 21363x on the driving side. It can be smaller than the number of rotations of the crank gear 21363 per unit rotation number of the gear 21361 in the meshed state.

When the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position and the ball 20681 is engaged with the recess 20681 in the guide groove 20364a (see FIGS. 21 (a), 21 (c), 71 and 72). As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (c), the driving side second tooth 21361y and the driven side second tooth 21363y are meshed with each other. When the gear 21361 is rotationally driven by the drive motor 341 from this state, the rotational driving force is transmitted through the teeth of the driving side second tooth 21361y and the driven side second tooth 21363y during a predetermined rotation angle. The crank gear 21363 is rotated and the second rack 20364 (displacement member 310) is raised or lowered.

In this case, as described above, in the gear 21361, the pitch circle of the driving side first tooth 21361x is made larger than the pitch circle of the driving side second tooth 21361y, and in the crank gear 21363, the driven side first tooth 21363x. Since the pitch circle of the driven side second tooth 21363y is made smaller than the pitch circle of the driven side second tooth 21363y, the reduction ratio in the state where the driving side second tooth 21361y and the driven side second tooth 21363y are meshed with each other is increased to increase the reduction ratio of the crank gear. 21363 can be rotated with greater torque.

Therefore, from the state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position and the ball 20682 is engaged with the recess 20681 (see FIGS. 21 (a), 21 (c), 71 and 72), the displacement member 310 When starting the ascending / descending of the 310, as shown in FIG. 73A or 73C, the reduction ratio between the gear 21361 and the crank gear 21363 is increased to increase the reduction ratio, and the drive motor 341 is in a high torque state. Can be driven. As a result, the engagement between the recess 20681 and the ball 20682 can be smoothly disengaged. Further, it is possible to suppress the power consumption of the drive motor 341 required for disengaging the engagement.

Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. 74 (a) is a rear view of the one-side member 22320L in the 22nd embodiment, and FIG. 74 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the one-side member 22320L in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 74 (a). be. Note that FIG. 74A corresponds to the rear view of FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the protruding tip of the rack shaft 331b of the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are not connected has been described, but the rack shaft 22331b of the back base 22331 in the 22nd embodiment is made of metal. It is fastened by the screw Scr of the above and is connected to the intermediate base 22332. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, in the one-side member 22320L in the 22nd embodiment, a cylindrical connecting protrusion 22332u is projected from the back surface of the intermediate base 22332, and the protruding tips are projected from the rack shaft 22331b of the back base 22331. Are connected in a fitted state. A female screw is threaded on the rack shaft 22331b of the rear base 22331, and a metal screw Scr inserted from the front side of the intermediate base 22332 to the inner peripheral side of the connecting protrusion 22332u is screwed into the female screw. Will be done.

As a result, a metal screw Scr is embedded inside the rack shaft 22331b of the back base 22331 along the projecting (erection) direction, so that the rack is integrally formed with the back base 22331 from the resin material. The rigidity of the shaft 22331b can be increased. Therefore, when the rack shaft 22331b is brought into contact with the end of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 (the end in the extension direction) and functions as a stopper in order to regulate the displacement of the second rack 364, The stopper function can be exerted firmly, and the rack shaft 22331b can be prevented from being damaged to improve its durability.

In the present embodiment, the female screw formed on the rack shaft 22331b is continuous to the back surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 74 (b)) of the back base 22331, and the screw Scr is the tip (right side of FIG. 74 (b)). ) Is set to a length that extends beyond the base of the rack shaft 22331b and reaches the back base 22331. That is, since the screw Scr connects the rack shaft 22331b and the back base 22331b, when the rack shaft 22331b functions as a stopper, the rack shaft 22331b can be suppressed from falling (tilting) with respect to the back base 22331. As a result, the stopper function can be exerted firmly, and the rack shaft 22331b can be prevented from being damaged to improve its durability.

In this case, since the rack shaft 22331b is connected to the connecting protrusion 22332u of the intermediate base 22332 in a fitted state, not only the rigidity of the metal screw Scr embedded inside but also the rigidity of the intermediate base 22332 is used. Therefore, it is possible to improve its own rigidity, and to that extent, it is possible to prevent damage when the rack shaft 22331b functions as a stopper, and to improve durability.

Further, the connecting protrusion 22332u of the intermediate base has the protruding tip fitted to the protruding tip of the rack shaft 22331b, and the outer diameter dimension is larger than the groove width dimension of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364. Set. As a result, the projecting tip surface (axial end surface, surface on the right side of FIG. 74 (b)) of the connecting protrusion 22332u can be made to face the front surface of the second rack 364. That is, by bringing the front surface of the second rack 364 into contact with the projecting tip surface of the connecting protrusion 22332u, the displacement of the second rack 364 to the front (leftward in FIG. 74 (b)) can be regulated. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling and posture disturbance of the second rack 364 and enable stable displacement.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, the second rack 364 is rotated around the rack shaft 22331b, and the tooth surface of the second rack 364 is used as the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. By displacing along the line (see FIG. 26), it is easy to maintain a constant meshing state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and the structure stabilizes the transmission of the driving force. , The displacement of the second rack 364 forward can be regulated by the connecting protrusion 22332u at the position (around the rack shaft 22331b) at the center of its rotation. As a result, the behavior of the second rack 364 can be effectively stabilized, and the meshing state with the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

In the present embodiment, the speed-increasing portion 365b (see FIG. 23) of the transmission gear 365 is omitted in order to enable the connection between the rack shaft 22331b and the connecting protrusion 22332u. In this case, a gear (not shown) pivotally supported by the intermediate base 22332 is meshed between the second pinion 365a and the first pinion 351 and the second pinion 365a to the first pinion are interposed via such a gear. The rotational driving force is transmitted to 351.

Next, the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 23300 according to the 23rd embodiment, and shows a state in which the front base 333 is removed. In FIG. 75, the ball screw mechanism 23700 is enlarged and shown in a partially cross-sectional view.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rack and pinion mechanisms of the first rack 351 and the first pinion 351 are used as the mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 341 to the displacement member 310 has been described, but in the 23rd embodiment, the rack and pinion mechanism is used. The ball screw mechanism 23700 is used as a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 341 to the displacement member 310. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, the vertical slide unit 23300 according to the 23rd embodiment includes a ball screw mechanism 23700. The ball screw mechanism 23700 includes nuts 23710 arranged on the left and right end side portions 314 (see FIGS. 13 and 14) of the displacement member 310, and metal arranged on one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively. It is provided with a screw shaft made of 23720, and a plurality of balls 23730 interposed between the nut 23710 and the spiral groove of the screw shaft 23730.

A pair of upper and lower shaft support members 23721 are fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R at positions facing each other with a predetermined interval, and the upper end and the lower end of the screw shaft 23720 are fixed to the upper and lower set of shaft support members 2372. Is held rotatably (shaft support). In this case, the screw shaft 23720 is arranged so that its axial direction is along the longitudinal direction of the one-side member 230L and the other-side member 230R. A known transmission mechanism (not shown) is interposed between the screw shaft 23720 and the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 9), and the left and right screws are driven by the driving force of the drive motor 341 transmitted via the transmission mechanism. The shafts 23720 are rotated independently of each other.

As the transmission mechanism, when the shaft of the screw shaft 237 and the shaft (drive shaft) of the drive motor 341 are arranged in parallel, either a spur gear, a helical gear, a bevel gear, or a rack pinion is used. When the mechanism including at least a part of the transmission path is arranged so that the shaft of the screw shaft 237 and the shaft (drive shaft) of the drive motor 341 intersect with each other, the immediate bevel gear or the curved bevel gear When a mechanism including at least one of them as a part of the transmission path is arranged so that the shaft of the screw shaft 237 and the shaft (drive shaft) of the drive motor 341 do not intersect with each other, the hypoid gear, the screw gear, or the screw gear or Mechanisms that include at least one of the worms and worm wheels as part of the transmission path are exemplified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the metal screw shaft 23720 is arranged on the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, respectively, and both ends (end-side portion 314) of the displacement member 310 are arranged on the screw shaft 23720. Is connected via the nut 23710 and the ball 23730, so that the displacement member 310, the one-side member 320L, and the other-side member 320R can be connected via the ball screw mechanism 23700, whereby the displacement member 310 and the displacement member 310 can be connected to each other. A closed connecting loop can be formed between the side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the interposition member 370.

That is, in the conventional product (that is, the structure in which the guide rod P is omitted from the first embodiment), the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 and the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are connected. The loop is divided, and the displacement member 310, the one-side member 320L, and the other-side member 320R are disconnected.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310, the one-side member 320L, and the other-side member 320R can be connected via the ball screw mechanism 23700 (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 23300 as a whole can be increased. Further, by fixing the screw shaft 23720 to the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, the rigidity of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R is improved by that amount. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 23300 as a whole.

In the present embodiment, the displacement member 310 is provided with the above-mentioned movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 can be displaced relative to the main body portion 311). Displacement between the guidance by the one-side member 320L and the guidance by the other-side member 320R (that is, the advancement of the nut 23710 that is linearly moved by the drive of the screw shaft 23720 of the one-side member 320L and the screw shaft 23720 of the other-side member 320R. Even if there is a deviation from the advance of the nut 23710, which is driven straight by the drive, the displacement is absorbed by the relative displacement of the movable mechanism, and the displacement member 310 is stably displaced (see FIG. 27). ..

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the end side portion 314 (nut 23710) is connected to the screw shaft 23720 via a plurality of balls 23730 fitted in the spiral groove, and is connected to the screw shaft 23720 in the direction perpendicular to the axis (diameter) of the screw shaft 23720. Since the relative displacement of the nut 23710 in the direction inclined to the axis of the screw shaft 23720 can be regulated, the posture of the end side portion 314 when the displacement member 310 is slidably displaced can be stabilized.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, by adopting the ball screw mechanism 23700, it is possible to regulate the rattling of the nut 23710 with respect to the screw shaft 23720 in the axial direction (straight direction). As a result, when a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member 320L of the displacement member 310 and the guidance by the other-side member 320R, a relative displacement can easily occur between the main body portion 311 and the end-side portion 314. The function of absorbing displacement due to such relative displacement can be reliably exerted.

That is, in the rack and pinion mechanism (first rack 315 and first pinion 351) in the first embodiment, the state of the displacement member 310 tends to be unstable because the meshing state fluctuates greatly. On the other hand, according to the ball screw mechanism 23700 in the present embodiment, the variation in the meshing state is extremely small due to the structure in which a plurality of balls 23730 are interposed between the spiral groove of the nut 23710 and the screw shaft 23720. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the rod-shaped body P.

In other words, in the first embodiment, the first configuration (first rack 315 and first pinion 351) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 341 to the displacement member 310, and the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R Two configurations, that is, a second configuration (rod-shaped body P) for improving the rigidity of the first rack 315 and stabilizing the posture of the first rack 315, are formed by separate members. The two configurations can be combined by one member (ball screw mechanism 23700). As a result, the structure can be simplified and the number of parts can be reduced.

Next, the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 24300 and the rear case 210 according to the 24th embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the upper and lower slide units 300 are rigidly connected to the back case 210 has been described, but the upper and lower slide units 300 in the 24th embodiment are elastically supported by the back case 210 via the rubber bush 24740. .. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 76, a plurality of cylindrical connecting protrusions 211b (six in the present embodiment) are projected from the bottom wall portion 211 toward the front in the back case 210, and the vertical slide unit 24300 is provided. Is formed by projecting a plurality of connecting plate portions 24750 having a holding hole 24750a (see FIG. 77) in the center toward the outside, and these connecting protrusions 211b and the connecting plate portion 24750 are connected via a rubber bush 24740. By being (fastened), the upper and lower slide units 24300 are elastically supported by the back case 210 via the rubber bush 24740.

A recess that opens at the tip of the protrusion is recessed in the connecting protrusion 211b, and a female screw is screwed onto the inner surface of the recess (see FIG. 77). The connecting plate portion 24750 is a portion that projects from the lower end of the intermediate base 332 (see FIG. 15) while inclining downward from the upper end inner side of the main body portion (vertically rectangular portion) and the overhanging portion of the intermediate base 332 (the lower end of the main body portion). ), And the left and right side surfaces in the lower portion of the intermediate member 370 (see FIG. 15), respectively. Each of these connecting plate portions 24750 is arranged substantially symmetrically on the left and right sides with the center in the width direction of the vertical slide unit 24300 as a symmetrical line.

The connecting plate portion 24750 on the upper end side of the intermediate base 332 is located above the displacement member 310 arranged in the raised position (see FIG. 21 (a)), and is connected to the lower end side of the intermediate base 332 and the intermediate member 370. The plate portion 24750 is located below the displacement member 310 arranged in the descending position (see FIG. 21 (c)). Further, the connecting plate portion 24750 on the lower end side of the intermediate base 332 and the intermediate member 370 is located inward of the connecting plate portion 24750 on the upper end side of the intermediate base 332.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper end side and the lower end side of the vertical slide unit 24300 are elastically supported, and the support position on the lower end side is positioned inward (closer to the center) than the support position on the upper end side. As a result, the rubber bush 24740 can easily absorb the wobbling and rattling of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R due to the displacement of the displacement member 310, and the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized.

Next, the details of the elastic support by the rubber bush 24740 will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

77 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the vertical slide unit 24300 in the direction of arrow LXXVIIa of FIG. 76, and FIG. 77 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the vertical slide unit 24300 in the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 77 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 77 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical slide unit 24300 in the line LXXVIc-LXXVIc of FIG. 77 (a). Note that FIG. 77 shows the vertical slide unit 24300 in a state of being attached to the rear case 210.

As shown in FIG. 77, the rubber bush 24740 has a main body portion 24741 formed in a cylindrical shape from a rubber-like elastic body, an insertion hole 24742 formed in the center of the main body portion 24741 along the axial direction, and the insertion hole 24742 thereof. Tensions 24743, which are located on the left and right sides of the insertion hole 24742 and are bored in parallel with the insertion hole 24741, and a tension formed by projecting outward from both axial ends of the main body 24741. It is provided with a protrusion 24744.

In the rubber bush 24740, the inner diameter of the insertion hole 24742 is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 211b, and the outer diameter of the main body 24741 excluding the overhanging portion 24744 is the connecting plate. The inner diameter of the holding hole 24750a of the portion 24750 is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the inner diameter. The outer diameter dimension of the overhanging portion 247434 is set to be larger than the inner diameter dimension of the holding hole 24750a of the connecting plate portion 24750.

Further, the facing distance of the pair of overhanging portions 24744 along the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) is equal to or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the connecting plate portion 24750 (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)). Set to dimensions.

As a result, as will be described later, by pushing the vertical slide unit 24300 into the rear case 210, the vertical slide unit 24300 can be attached to the rear case 210 while forming a state of being elastically supported by the rubber bush 24740. Workability at the time of mounting can be improved.

Further, since the overhanging portion 24744 is formed on the main body portion 24741, the vertical slide unit 24300 can be elastically supported in the front-rear direction (FIG. 77 (b) left-right direction) with respect to the rear case 210, and the vertical slide unit 24300 can be provided. It is possible to prevent the rear case 210 from falling forward (to the right in FIG. 77 (b)). Since the ring-forming unit 400 is arranged in front of the vertical slide unit 24300 (see FIG. 6), it is possible to regulate the excessive displacement of the vertical slide unit 24300 forward by the ring-forming unit 400. From this point as well, it is possible to prevent the vertical slide unit 24300 from falling forward.

To attach the vertical slide unit 24300 to the back case 210, first, the connecting protrusion 211b of the back case 210 is inserted into the insertion hole 24742 of the rubber bush 24740, and the rubber bush 24740 is attached to the connecting protrusion 211b. In this case, the rubber bush 24740 is mounted in a posture (circumferential position) in which the direction (FIG. 77 (a) left-right direction) connecting the pair of curving portions 24743 faces the width direction (left-right direction) of the rear case 210.

Next, the back surface of the vertical slide unit 24300 faces the front of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 76), and the vertical slide unit 24300 is directed toward the rear case 210 while aligning the connecting plate portion 24750 and the connecting protrusion 211b. Push it in.

As a result, the main body portion 24741 of the rubber bush 24740 can be inserted into the insertion hole 24750a of the connecting plate portion 24750, and the connecting plate portion 24750 can be externally fitted into the rubber bush 24740. A screw Scr having a seat (flange) having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 211b is fastened. As a result, as shown in FIG. 77, the vertical slide unit 24300 can be elastically supported by the back case 210 via the rubber bush 24740.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the vertical slide unit 24300 is elastically supported with respect to the back case 210 via the rubber bush 24740, the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized. That is, at least one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are not rigidly connected to the back case 210, but are attached (elastically supported) in a displaceable state. Therefore, by utilizing the displacement (that is, rattling or wobbling) of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member 320L of the displacement member 310 and the guidance by the other-side member 320R is absorbed. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the pair of curving portions 24744 are bored in the rubber bush 24740, the spring constant in the first direction (FIG. 77 (a) left-right direction) connecting the pair of curving portions 24744. , The spring constant in the second direction (vertical direction in FIG. 77 (a)) orthogonal to the first direction can be made different. That is, the support rigidity (spring constant) when the vertical slide unit 24300 is elastically supported by the back case 210 can be made smaller in the first direction than in the second direction.

As a result, while restricting a relatively large displacement of the vertical slide unit 24300 (one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) in the second direction (vertical direction), the vertical slide unit 24300 in the first direction (horizontal direction). The displacement of (one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) can be allowed to be relatively large. As a result, it is possible to easily absorb the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member 320L of the displacement member 310 and the guidance by the other-side member 320R, and the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized.

Next, the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 25300 and the ring forming unit 25400 according to the 25th embodiment.

Note that FIG. 78 corresponds to a front view of the vertical slide unit 25300 and the annulus forming unit 25400 in a state of being attached to the rear case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operating unit 200). Further, FIG. 78 shows the vertical slide unit 25300 and the ring forming unit 25400 partially by a virtual plane passing through the center of the ring dividing bodies 440L1 to 440R2 in the ring forming unit 25400 in the plate thickness direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 78). Corresponds to the cross-sectional view cut into.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 313 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor arranged inside the rotation base 312 has been described, but the rotating body 313 in the 25th embodiment is the ring-divided body 440L2. , The rotating body 313 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 25761 arranged on the 440R1. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the vertical slide unit 25300 according to the 25th embodiment has a drive motor and a gear mechanism (neither shown) arranged inside the rotation base 312 with respect to the vertical slide unit 300 according to the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same, except that the setting is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 78, the ring forming unit 25400 in the 25th embodiment has a plurality of (two in this embodiment) drive mechanisms (drive motor 25761, gear mechanism 25762 and) inside the ring dividing body 440L2, 440R1. A roller member 25763) is arranged. The drive mechanism is for rotationally driving the rotating body 313, and is arranged symmetrically with respect to the rotation center of the rotating body 313 from the front viewpoint. Therefore, as will be described later, it is possible to suppress rattling and wobbling of the displacement member 310 when rotating the rotating body 313.

The gear mechanism 25762 rotatably holds (shafts) the roller member 25763, decelerates the rotational driving force input from the drive motor 25761, and then transmits the rotational driving force to the roller member 25763 to rotate the roller member 25763. .. The roller member 25763 is formed from a rubber-like elastic body in a disk shape, and is approximately one-third of the circumference from an opening formed on the side surface of the ring-divided body 440L2, 440R1 (the surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313). It is arranged in a state where the outer peripheral surface of the rubber is projected.

As described above, after the vertical slide unit 25300 arranges the displacement member 310 between the ascending position and the descending position, the annulus forming unit 25400 arranges the annulus divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 at the annulus forming position. Therefore, the rotating bodies 313 having a circular front view can be concentrically arranged on the inner peripheral side of the ring shape formed by the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the roller member 25763 is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313. Therefore, the roller member 25763 is rotationally driven by the drive motor 25761 to rotate. The body 313 can be rotated. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a drive mechanism such as a drive motor for rotating the rotating body 313 in the rotation base 312, the displacement member 310 can be reduced in weight by that amount.

Here, as described above, in the structure in which one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction are separately guided and driven by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively, the guidance and driving by the one side member 320 , The displacement between the guidance and the drive by the other side member 320R is likely to occur. Therefore, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance and driving by the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, not only the load of each drive motor 341 becomes excessive, but also the displacement member 310 may be stopped.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating body 313 can be rotated by the drive mechanism (drive motor 25761 or the like) arranged in the ring dividing body 440L2, 440R1 of the ring forming unit 25400, and the rotating body 313 can be rotated. It is not necessary to dispose a drive mechanism (drive motor or the like) for rotating the wheel in the rotation base 312 (displacement member 310).

Therefore, the weight of the displacement member 310 as a whole can be reduced, and the weight reduction can prevent a deviation between the guidance and drive by the one-side member 320L and the guidance and drive by the other-side member 320R. The displacement member 310 can be stably displaced. In addition, the size of the rotating body 313 can be increased by the amount of weight reduction, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 310 is provided with a movable mechanism (a structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 311), when the rotating body 313 is rotated, the movable body portion 313 is rotated. Along with the rotation, rattling or wobbling occurs with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 collides with the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape (annular split body 440L1 to 440R2). , Causes damage. Even if there is no collision, if rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 continues as the rotating body 313 rotates, the movable portion (for example, the projecting pin 311a or the elongated hole 314a) Causes wear.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 of the ring-forming unit 25400 are arranged at the ring-forming positions, and the rotating body 313 is located on the inner peripheral side of the ring shape. When the roller member 25763 is formed, as shown in FIG. 78, the roller member 25763 is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating 313, and the rotating body 313 is opposed to the rotating body 313 by the roller member 25763 (the phases are different by 180 degrees). It can be sandwiched from the position).

As a result, the main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 can be held by the ring forming unit 25400, so that the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 can be regulated (the movable mechanism is fixed). .. As a result, even if the rotating body 313 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 311 from rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, whereby the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (circle). It is possible to prevent the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2) from colliding with the inner peripheral surface and to prevent the movable portion (for example, the projecting pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) from being worn or damaged.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the roller member 25763 formed of the rubber-like elastic body is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313, the annular shape and the rotating body 313 formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are formed. Even if an axial deviation (positional deviation in the radial direction) occurs between the two, the axial deviation can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller member 25763. Therefore, the rotating body 313 can be rotated.

Here, the roller member 25763 is replaced with a gear, and teeth (gears) that can be meshed with the gear are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313, and the gear is rotationally driven in a state where these are meshed. Therefore, a structure for rotating the rotating body 313 is also conceivable. However, in this structure, when the ring shape is formed by the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 (that is, in the state shown in FIG. 78), the tooth ridges of the gear and the tooth ridges of the rotating body 313 are formed. Collision can damage your teeth. In order to avoid this, phase matching (positioning the crest of one tooth in the valley of the other tooth) may be performed, but in that case, a sensor device is required, which increases the cost and complicates control. Invite to change.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the outer peripheral surface of the roller member 25763 having a circular shape in the axial direction (that is, the shape in which the teeth (gears) are not formed) is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313. It is not necessary to perform phase matching between the roller member 25763 and the rotating body 313. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a sensor device, and the cost can be reduced accordingly. Moreover, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

Next, the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit 26300 and the ring forming unit 26400 in the 26th embodiment.

Note that FIG. 79 corresponds to a rear view of the vertical slide unit 26300 and the annulus forming unit 26400 in a state of being attached to the rear case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operating unit 200).

In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are not in contact with each other except for the attachment portion to the rear case 210 has been described, but in the 26th embodiment, the vertical slide unit 26300 and the vertical slide unit 26300 have been described. The ring forming unit 26400 is partially contactable. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 79, the vertical slide unit 26300 and the ring forming unit 26400 in the 26th embodiment have a fixing mechanism (fixing claw 26771, attached) to the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same, except that the force spring 26772 and the extrusion protrusion 26773) are arranged. Hereinafter, the description of these same configurations will be omitted.

As described above, after the vertical slide unit 26300 arranges the displacement member 310 between the ascending position and the descending position, the annulus forming unit 26400 arranges the annulus divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 at the annulus forming position. Therefore, the rotating bodies 313 having a circular front view can be concentrically arranged on the inner peripheral side of the ring shape formed by the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2.

In this case, in a structure in which one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction are guided and driven separately by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, the guidance and driving by the one side member 320 and the other side member 320R Displacement is likely to occur between the guidance and drive. Therefore, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance and driving by the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, not only the load of each drive motor 341 becomes excessive, but also the displacement member 310 may be stopped.

On the other hand, if a gap is provided between the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 to the extent that they do not collide, the effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by the ring shape can be obtained. I can't fully demonstrate it. Further, even when the rotating body 313 does not collide with the annular shape (circular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2), rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 occurs as the rotating body 313 rotates. If continued, the moving parts (for example, the projecting pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) will be worn.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the fixing mechanism is in a state where the rotating bodies 313 are concentrically arranged on the inner peripheral side of the ring shape formed by the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. The main body portion 311 (rotation base 312) of the displacement member 310 can be held by the fixing claw 26771. Therefore, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 can be regulated (the movable mechanism is fixed). As a result, even if the rotating body 313 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 311 from rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, whereby the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (circle). It is possible to prevent the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2) from colliding with the inner peripheral surface and to prevent the movable portion (for example, the projecting pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) from being worn or damaged.

Here, in the fixing mechanism of the present embodiment, the fixing claw 26771 is formed so as to be displaceable. Specifically, the fixed claw 26771 is retracted to the back side of the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player from the front, and the ring shape of the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. It is formed so as to project toward the inner peripheral side of the rotary base 312 and swing between the position where the rotation base 312 can come into contact with the outer peripheral surface. Details of such a fixing mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 80.

80 (a) to 80 (c) are rear views of the ring-divided body 440L1, the posture defining member 450, and the fixing mechanism. Note that FIG. 80 (a) shows a state in which the ring-divided body 440R1 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 80 (b) shows the annulus-divided body 440R1 arranged between the retracted position and the ring-forming position. In FIG. 80 (c), the state in which the ring-divided body 440R1 is arranged at the ring-forming position is shown.

Here, the fixing mechanisms arranged in the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are formed symmetrically or vertically symmetrically, and their configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, they are arranged in the annular divided body 440R1. The fixing mechanism to be used will be described as a typical example, and the description of other fixing mechanisms will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 80, the fixing mechanism includes a fixing claw 2671, an urging spring 2672 that applies an urging force for returning to the fixing claw 2671, and a fixing claw against the urging force of the urging spring 2672. It is mainly provided with an extrusion protrusion 2673 for extruding the 2671. The fixed claw 2671 is formed in a flat plate rod shape, and is oscillatingly supported on the back surface side of the annular divided body 440R1 via a shaft 26771a.

In the present embodiment, the urging spring 26772 is formed as a torsion coil spring, and a pin-shaped body protruding from the back surface side (the surface on the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 80) of the annular split body 440R1 is inserted into the coil portion. Be retained. In the urging spring 26772, one arm (arm) is engaged with the annular split body 440R1, the other arm (arm) is brought into contact with the side surface of the fixed claw 26771, and the fixed claw 26771 is placed in the initial position (FIG. The urging force is applied in the direction of maintaining the position shown in 80 (a)).

The extrusion pin 26773 is a columnar body protruding from the front surface of the posture defining member 450 (the surface on the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 80), and is fixed when the annular divided body 440R1 is relatively displaced with respect to the posture defining member 450. It is located on the movement locus of the claw 26771. That is, the extrusion pin 26773 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the side surface of the fixing claw 26771.

According to the fixing mechanism formed in this way, as shown in FIG. 80A, in the state where the annular split body 440R1 is arranged at the retracted position, the urging force of the urging spring 26772 is applied. , The fixed claw 26771 is maintained (arranged) in the initial position. In such an initial position, the fixed claw 26771 is located on the back side of the annular split body 440R1, and it is possible to prevent the fixed claw 26771 from being visually recognized by the player from the front.

From the state shown in FIG. 80A, when the posture defining member 450 is advanced with the rotation of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436, the annular division body 440R1 is lowered relative to the posture defining member 450. (See FIGS. 39 and 40). When the annular split body 440R1 is lowered to a predetermined position, the extruded protrusion 26773 is brought into contact with the side surface of the fixing claw 26771, and when the annular split body 440R1 is further lowered with respect to the posture defining member 450, FIG. As shown in b), swinging around the shaft 26771a of the fixed claw 26771 is started while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 26772.

As the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 rotate, the posture defining member 450 is advanced to the maximum, and the ring dividing body 440R1 is lowered to the ring forming position (see FIG. 41), as shown in FIG. 80 (c). The fixing claw 26771 is pushed out to the extrusion protrusion 26773 (that is, the fixing claw 26771 is further swung around the shaft 26771a while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 26772), and the tip thereof is the rotation base 312. It comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface (see FIG. 79).

In the state where the ring-divided body 440R1 is arranged at the ring-forming position (state in FIG. 80 (c)), the rotation center of the rotating body 313 (rotation base 312) is on the extension line in the longitudinal direction of the fixed claw 26771. To position. That is, since the line connecting the shaft 26771a and the rotation center of the rotating body 313 coincides with the longitudinal direction of the fixed claw 26771, the rotation base 312 can be pressed toward the center by the four fixing claws 26771 (). (See FIG. 79).

As a result, the rotating body 313 can be restrained from all sides, and its displacement (rattling or wobbling) can be easily suppressed in any direction. Further, when the relative position of the rotating body 313 is deviated from the annular shape (inner peripheral surface) formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, the rotating body 313 is displaced from the annular shape. Can be centered so that they are located concentrically.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the rotating body 313 is held by the fixing claw 26771 (main body portion 311 and end side portion 314) by utilizing the operation performed by the ring forming unit 26400 for the effect of forming the ring shape. It is possible to regulate the relative displacement with and to, and further, the fixing claw 26771 can be swung. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide both a driving means for holding the rotating body 313 (regulation of relative displacement) and a driving means for swinging the fixed claw 26771, thereby reducing the product cost accordingly. be able to.

From the state shown in FIG. 80 (c), when the posture defining member 450 is retracted due to the rotation of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 in the direction opposite to the above-described case, the ring split body 440R1 defines the posture. It is raised relative to the member 450 (see FIGS. 39-41). With the relative movement of the annular split body 440 with respect to the posture defining member 450, the amount of pushing out of the fixing claw 26771 by the extrusion protrusion 26773 is reduced, and the urging force of the urging spring 26772 causes the fixing claw 26771 to be centered on the shaft 26771a. It is swung in the opposite direction (that is, toward the initial position shown in FIG. 80 (a)).

When the annular split body 440R1 is raised to a predetermined position, the fixed claw 26771 is retracted to the back side of the annular split body 440R1 as shown in FIG. 80 (b). It can be made invisible to the player. After that, as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 rotate in the opposite directions, the posture defining member 450 is retracted to the maximum and the annular split body 440R1 is raised to the retracted position (see FIG. 39). ), The urging force of the urging spring 26772 returns the fixed claw 26771 to the initial position and maintains the fixed claw 26771 at the initial position.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

For example, assuming that the configuration is one engagement structure by the engaged portion 12331f of the one-side members 12320R and 12320L in the twelfth embodiment and the engaging portion 12372 of the interposition member 12370 and one urging spring 11366 in the eleventh embodiment. A gaming machine may be configured by combining with the configuration to be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the urging spring 366 has a substantially “dogleg” -shaped posture in the front view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the front view is substantially “L” -shaped and the front surface. The posture may be a substantially "S" -shaped posture or a front-viewing abbreviated "J" -shaped posture, or a posture in which these may be combined. That is, the bent posture of the bias spring 366 may be any shape as long as it is formed by bending or bending the coil spring at one or a plurality of points.

In each of the above embodiments, the elongated hole 314a formed in the end side portion 314 is formed in a front view elliptical shape in which the semicircles on both sides are connected by a straight line, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other It may be in the shape of. That is, as long as the projecting pin 311a is formed so as to be displaceable, for example, it may be formed by being curved in a front view arc shape, or may be formed in a front view "dogleg" shape. These may be formed in combination.

In each of the above embodiments, the vertical slide unit 300 is arranged in a posture in which the displacement member 310 is displaced along the gravity direction (vertical direction), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the displacement member 310 is in the horizontal direction. It may be arranged in a posture of being displaced along (a direction orthogonal to the direction of gravity), and the displacement member 310 may be arranged in a posture of being displaced along a direction of inclination with respect to the direction of gravity (vertical direction). You may. Even with these postures, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In each of the above embodiments, the abutting surfaces of the ring-divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, 17440L1 to 17440R2 are brought into contact with each other in a circular motion locus while maintaining a posture parallel to each other. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, it may be close to each other while changing the parallelism with respect to the contact surface of the other party, and finally abut in a parallel posture. While maintaining a posture parallel to each other with respect to the contact surface of the other party, they are brought close to each other by a linear motion in a direction non-vertical to the contact surface, and finally contact with each other in a parallel posture. Is also good.

In the first embodiment, the relative displacement amount between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is regulated within a predetermined range by the contact of the stopper surfaces 311a and 314a, but the relative displacement amount is not necessarily limited to this, and instead. Alternatively, in addition to this, the protrusion pin 311a may come into contact with the end of the elongated hole 314a to regulate the relative displacement amount between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a predetermined range. ..

In the first embodiment, in assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked to the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c, but this is not necessarily the case. Without limitation, the other end of the urging spring 366 may be locked to the intermediate base 332 via the second opening 331d.

In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the displacement members 4310 and 5310 are driven by the drive motor 341 of the one side member 320L, but the displacement members 4310 and 5310 are not necessarily limited to this, and the displacement members 4310 are driven by the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R. , 5310 may be driven. That is, the drive side is the movable mechanism side where slide displacement is allowed or the rubber hardness is low (soft), but the movable mechanism side where only rotation is allowed or the rubber hardness is high (hard) is the drive side. May be.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack by the expansion / contraction operation of the expansion / contraction actuator 13671 and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 are the same. As it is, the angle (tilt angle) formed by both directions is increased or decreased, but the tilt direction may be reversed. For example, when the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended to a predetermined position, the direction of inclination is set to the right (for example, the state shown in FIG. 58B), and when the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened from that state, the above The state in which the inclination disappears (that is, the direction of the urging force applied to the second rack from the urging spring 366 and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 coincide with each other, and are shown in FIG. 58 (c), for example. A form in which the direction of inclination is leftward is exemplified through the state). As a result, the direction of the urging force applied to the second rack 364 from the urging spring 366 is changed (reversed) according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). Adjustments can be made.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the side surface of the second rack 15364 (the surface on the left side of FIG. 60) is formed as a flat surface, and the side surface of the second rack 15364 and the first regulating portion 15331g are not engaged with each other. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if a recess (for example, corresponding to the recess 16681 in the 16th embodiment) that can be engaged with the first regulation portion 15331g is formed on the side surface of the second rack 15364. good. As a result, as in the case of the 16th embodiment, the linear motion of the second rack 15364 can be regulated, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

In the 21st embodiment, the case where the first tooth 21361x on the driving side and the second tooth 21361y on the driving side have the same tooth width in the gear 21361 has been described, but the tooth width is not necessarily limited to this and is different. Of course, it is possible. When different tooth widths are used, it is preferable that the tooth width of the driving side second tooth 21361y is larger than the tooth width of the driving side first tooth 21361x. By keeping the tooth width of the drive-side first tooth 21361x relatively small, the material cost can be reduced, and the durability of the drive-side second tooth 21361y to which a higher torque is applied than the drive-side first tooth 21361x is applied. This is because it is possible to improve the sex.

As a means for improving the durability of the second tooth 21361y on the drive side, other means may be adopted instead of or in addition to the means for increasing the tooth width. As another means, for example, the material of the driving side second tooth 21361y, which makes the tooth thickness of the driving side second tooth 21361y larger than the tooth thickness of the driving side first tooth 21361x, is made from the material of the driving side first tooth 21361x. Examples of means are such that a material having a high strength or a material having a rigidity higher than that of the drive-side second tooth 21361y (for example, a metal material) is embedded in the drive-side second tooth 21361y.

In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the spiral groove of the ball screw mechanism 23700 is set to the single screw has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to use two or more screws. For example, by using a double-threaded screw, the amount of movement (lead) of the nut 23710 per rotation of the screw shaft 23720 can be increased as compared with the case of a single-threaded screw, so that the speed of the displacement member 310 can be increased. can.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the case where the nut 23710 is formed as an integral member has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the nut 23710 is formed so as to be divisible into two members and the nut 23710 is formed. May be provided with a driving means for moving the nuts into a split state or an integrated state. As a result, when raising the displacement member 310, the nut 23710 is integrated so that the rotation of the screw shaft 23720 can be transmitted to the nut 23710 via the ball 23730, and the displacement member 310 is raised by the rotation of the screw shaft 23720. On the other hand, when lowering the displacement member 310, the nut 23710 can be divided, the nut 23710 can be separated from the screw shaft 23720, and the displacement member 310 can be lowered by the action of gravity. As a result, the time required for the displacement member 310 to descend can be shortened.

In the above 24th embodiment, the case where the rubber bush 24740 is provided with the excellent portion 24743 to give directionality to the spring constant of the rubber bush 24740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of this, the case has been described. Alternatively, in addition to this, other means may be adopted. As another means, a means for making the cross-sectional shape of the connecting protrusion 211b of the back case 210 irregular is exemplified.

Specifically, the cross-sectional shape of the connecting protrusion 211b is an elliptical shape, and the major axis direction of the elliptical shape is set to the second direction described above. As a result, in the second direction, the main body portion 24741 is compressed between the connecting protrusion portion 211b and the connecting plate portion 24750 (holding hole 24750a) as compared with the first direction. As in the case, the spring constant in the second direction can be made larger than the spring constant in the first direction.

In the 24th embodiment, the case where a plurality of rubber bushes 24740 (six in the present embodiment) have the same configuration has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least one rubber bush 24740 is used. The configuration may be different from that of other rubber bushes 24740.

In this case, the rubber hardness of the rubber bush 24740 that elastically supports the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R on the back case 210 is higher than the rubber hardness of the rubber bush 24740 that elastically supports the intermediate member 370 on the back case 210. It is preferable to make it low (soft). According to this, since the rubber hardness is different only, the molding die for vulcanizing and molding the rubber bush 24740 can also be used, and the cost can be suppressed. Further, since the displacement of the vertical slide unit 24300 (one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) can be easily allowed while restricting the displacement of the intermediate member 370, the guidance by the one side member 320L of the displacement member 310 can be made easy. It is possible to easily absorb the deviation from the guidance caused by the other side member 320R, and the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized.

In the 24th embodiment, the case where the rubber bushes 24740 are provided at all the connection points (6 places in the present embodiment) between the vertical slide unit 24300 and the back base 210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. However, the rubber bush 24740 may be provided only partially.

For example, a rubber bush 24740 is provided only at a location where the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R are connected to the back case 210 (four locations in the present embodiment), and a location where the intervention member 370 is connected to the back case 210 (. In this embodiment, two places) are exemplified without a rubber bush 24740 being provided and rigidly connected. According to this, the required number of rubber bushes 24740 can be reduced and the cost can be suppressed. Further, while the interposition member 370 is restrained so as not to be displaced, the displacement of the vertical slide unit 24300 (one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) can be easily allowed, so that the one side member 320L of the displacement member 310 is used. The deviation between the guide and the guide due to the other side member 320R can be easily absorbed, and the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized.

In the 24th embodiment, the case where the rubber bush 24740 is adopted as the means for elastically supporting the vertical slide unit 24300 to the back case 210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other means are adopted. Is also good. Examples of other means include elastomers such as coil springs, torsion springs, metal springs typified by leaf springs, and urethane. With these, the same effect as the effect of the elastic support described above can be obtained.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the drive mechanism is arranged at two places has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive mechanism may be arranged at only one place or at three or more places. .. However, when arranging them at a plurality of places, it is preferable to arrange them at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The restraint position of the rotating body 313 by the roller member 25763 can be made uniform in the circumferential direction, and the displacement (rattling or wobbling) of the rotating body 313 can be suppressed in any direction in the radial direction. When the relative position of the rotating body 313 is deviated from the annular shape (inner peripheral surface) formed by 440L1 to 440R2, the core that positions the rotating body 313 concentrically with respect to the annular shape. This is because it can also be put out.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the rotating body 313 is rotationally driven by rotating the roller member 35763 in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, A fan may be provided in the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, and the wind generated by the fan may be blown onto the rotating body 313 to rotationally drive the rotating body 313.

In the above-mentioned 26th embodiment, although the description thereof is omitted, a rubber-like elastic body may be attached to one or both of the tip of the fixed claw 26771 or the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 312. This is because slippage when the tip of the fixing claw 26771 is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating base 312 can be suppressed, and the fixing of the rotating base 312 by the fixing claw 26771 can be strengthened.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the projecting pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a as an example>
One side member and the other side member arranged at predetermined intervals, and one side member and the other side member are erected between the one side member and the other side member, and one end side and the other end side are guided to the one side member and the other side member, respectively. In a gaming machine provided with a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, a movable mechanism formed to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is one end side of the displacement member and others. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is interposed at at least one place between it and the end side.

Here, a driving force is applied to the one-side member and the other-side member arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval, a long displacement member erected between the one-side member and the other-side member, and the displacement member. A gaming machine provided with a driving means to be provided is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14602). According to this gaming machine, one side member is formed so as to be able to guide one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the other side member is formed so as to be able to guide the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. Then, the displacement member is displaced along the one-side member and the other-side member.

However, in a structure in which one side of the displacement member in the longitudinal direction is guided to the one side member and the other side in the longitudinal direction is separately guided to the other side member as in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the guidance by the one side member and the other side member are guided separately. There is a problem that it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member because the displacement is likely to occur between the guide and the guide. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, not only the load of the driving means becomes excessive, but also the displacement member may be stopped.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, a movable mechanism formed so as to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism to stably displace the displacement member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the driving means from becoming excessive and the displacement member from stopping.

The direction of displacement of the displacement member is not limited, and may be displaced along the vertical direction (direction in which gravity acts), or may be displaced along the horizontal direction orthogonal to the vertical direction. Alternatively, it may be displaced along an inclined direction between the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Further, as a deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, for example, when there is a difference in the guidance speed of the displacement member between the one-side member side and the other-side member side, or the displacement member. An example is a case where there is a difference in the guiding direction (phase) of the above, or a case where there is a difference between the two. The same applies to the following, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the movable mechanism is formed by including a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, a movable mechanism is formed by including a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove, so that the structure of the movable mechanism is simplified. Can be changed. Further, since the movable amount and the movable direction of the movable mechanism can be arbitrarily set according to the shape (contour) of the guide groove, it is suitable for the mode of deviation occurring between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member. Easy to configure a movable mechanism.

The guide groove may be a through hole or a concave groove as long as the guided portion can be guided by the inner wall surface thereof. Further, the guided portion may have a shape that can be displaced or (and) rotated in the guide groove, and examples thereof include a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section, a polygonal cross section, and an elliptical cross section. The guide groove may allow only the rotation of the guided portion. That is, the guide groove is not limited to a linear shape, a curved line shape, or a shape extending in combination thereof, and may be formed in a circular shape or a polygonal shape that allows only the rotation of the guided portion. good.

In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the guide groove of the movable mechanism is formed in a long hole shape long in the direction connecting the one-side member and the other-side member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the guide groove of the movable mechanism is a long hole long in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member (that is, the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member). Since it is formed in a shape, the guided portion can be easily displaced (easily guided) along the guide groove, and the displacement caused between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member can be effectively eliminated by the movable mechanism. Can be absorbed into.

The groove width of the guide groove (width in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole shape) is preferably substantially equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guided portion. The direction in which the guided portion is displaced (guided) along the guide groove can be regulated in the direction connecting the one-side member and the other-side member, and the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member can be regulated. This is because the absorption by the movable mechanism can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine A3, the movable mechanism is the gaming machine A4, wherein a plurality of the guide grooves are formed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the movable mechanism is formed with a plurality of elongated hole-shaped guide grooves long in the direction connecting the one-side member and the other-side member, so that the rigidity of the movable mechanism is high. It is possible to suppress rattling and wobbling when the displacement member is displaced.

If the plurality of guide grooves have an elongated hole shape that is long in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member, the start and end positions of the guide grooves are along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. May be different from each other. That is, as long as the guide grooves are formed parallel to each other, their arrangement positions may be different along the direction connecting the one-side member and the other-side member.

In the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by including a ball joint including a spherical ball portion and a socket portion that makes spherical contact with the ball portion.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by providing a ball joint composed of a spherical ball portion and a socket portion that makes spherical contact with the ball portion, so that the movable mechanism can be made smooth. It can be deformed, and the deviation generated between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member can be stably absorbed. Further, since the movable mechanism can be deformed in all directions, it can be absorbed regardless of the direction of deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member.

A6, wherein in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body, and the deformation of the elastic body causes guidance by one side member and the other side member. Not only can the displacement between the guide and the guide be absorbed, but the movable mechanism can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the elastic body. Further, when the elastic body is made of an elastomer, the vibration of the movable mechanism (displacement member) can be converged at an early stage by utilizing its viscous characteristic (damping effect), so that the above-mentioned deviation can be suppressed. ..

Examples of the elastic body include an elastomer (rubber-like elastic body, urethane, etc.) and an elastic spring (coil spring, torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.). Further, a movable mechanism having a guide groove and a guided portion or a movable mechanism having a ball joint may be further provided with an elastic body. As a result, the function of returning to the initial position and the function of facilitating the convergence of vibration can be further added to the movable mechanism.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the movable mechanism is provided with a regulating means for regulating deformation exceeding a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a regulating means for restricting deformation exceeding a predetermined amount is provided, so that between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member. It is possible to prevent the movable mechanism from being damaged due to excessive deformation when absorbing the generated deviation.

As a regulating means, when the movable mechanism includes the guide groove and the guided portion, the guided portion is restrained on the inner wall surface (for example, the end) of the guide groove, thereby restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more. Examples thereof include those that regulate the deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more by contacting one of the deforming members separated by the interposition of the movable mechanism with the other.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the movable mechanism is interposed between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the movable mechanism is interposed between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, so that the one-side member is provided. When there is a gap between the guidance by the other side member and the guidance by the other side member, one of the movable mechanisms provided in two places is deformed according to the guidance state by the one side member and the other side member. It can be deformed according to the guidance state by, and the displacement can be reliably absorbed by the interlocking of both movable mechanisms. Therefore, the displacement member can be stably displaced, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the driving means from becoming excessive and the displacement member from stopping.

In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is characterized in that one end side is driven by the driving means and the other end side is driven, and the movable mechanisms interposed at the two places are different from each other. Gaming machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving (one-sided driving). The product cost can be set to 1 as compared with a structure in which the number of displaced means is 2 to drive one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, respectively (both sides driven). Can be reduced.

In this case, in the one-sided drive structure, the state of one end side (driven side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end side (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where there is a tendency for a gap between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member, according to the gaming machine A8, each of the two movable mechanisms has a deformation mode suitable for the drive side and a deformation suitable for the driven side. It can be used as a mode. As a result, the deviation generated between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even if it is driven on one side, the displacement member can be stably displaced, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the driving means from becoming excessive and the displacement member from stopping.

In the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations are characterized in that at least one of the allowable deformation amount and the deformation direction is different from each other.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms provided in the two places are different from each other in at least one of the allowable deformation amount and the deformation direction. Each of the above can be made to bear a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. For example, the amount of deformation allowed by the movable mechanism on the driving side is made larger (or smaller) than the amount of deformation allowed by the movable mechanism on the driven side, or the deformation direction allowed by the movable function on the driving side is set on the driven side. The direction can be different from the deformation direction allowed by the movable mechanism of. As a result, the deviation generated between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even if it is driven on one side, the displacement member can be stably displaced, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the driving means from becoming excessive and the displacement member from stopping.

As an aspect of the gaming machine A10, for example, in one movable mechanism, a shaft-shaped guided portion is pivotally supported in a circular guide groove and only rotation is allowed, and in the other movable mechanism, an elongated hole shape is allowed. A shaft-shaped guided portion is slidably inserted into the guide groove to allow displacement along the extending direction of the guide groove, or the guide grooves of both movable mechanisms are formed in an elongated hole shape. However, since the extending directions are different from each other, a mode in which the sliding direction of the guided portion is different from each other in one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations are characterized in that the forces required for deforming by a unit amount are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms provided in the two places are movable in two places because the forces required to deform by a unit amount are different from each other. Each of the mechanisms can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. For example, the movable mechanism on the driving side can be more easily deformed (or less likely to be deformed) than the movable mechanism on the driven side. As a result, the deviation generated between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even if it is driven on one side, the displacement member can be stably displaced, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the driving means from becoming excessive and the displacement member from stopping.

As an aspect of the gaming machine A11, for example, when both movable mechanisms are formed with the same type or different types of elastic bodies, the elastic bodies are deformed by one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism. Ease (hardness when the elastic body is an elastomer, spring constant when the elastic body is an elastic spring) is different from each other, and both movable mechanisms are formed with the same type of elastic body, but their elasticity. Examples thereof include modes in which the size of the body (dimensions such as cross-sectional area) differs between one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism.

In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is driven by different driving means on one end side and the other end side, respectively.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, one end side and the other end side are driven by different driving means (both-sided driving), so that the structure is driven by one driving means (one-sided driving). Since the shared load of the driving means can be reduced as compared with the above, it is possible to increase the size of the displacement member or increase the displacement speed of the displacement member accordingly.

In such a two-sided drive structure, it is difficult to completely synchronize the drive on one end side and the drive on the other end side of the displacement member, and there is a gap between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. , And the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable, so it has not been possible to adopt it in the past. On the other hand, as in the present invention, by interposing the movable mechanism in two places between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, a structure of both sides drive can be adopted for the first time, thereby causing displacement. While ensuring stable displacement of the members, it has become possible to increase the size of the displacement members or increase the displacement speed of the displacement members.

In the gaming machine A12, the "different driving means" is the same as the "two driving means". Therefore, the configuration of the drive means itself (type (for example, brush motor, brushless motor, stepping motor, etc.), characteristics (for example, torque vs. current characteristics, torque vs. rotation speed characteristics, etc.), capacity (for example, rated output, etc.), etc. ) May have the same configuration or different configurations. The same applies to the following.

One end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means and the other end side is driven, and the movable mechanism is one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. The gaming machine A13 is characterized in that the displacement member is interposed so as to be biased toward either one end side or the other end side with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving (one side). (Drive), so the number of arrangements of the drive means can be 1, and compared with the structure (both sides drive) in which the number of arrangements of the drive means is 2 to drive one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, respectively. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Similarly, since the movable mechanism is provided in only one place, the product cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the movable mechanism is provided in two places.

In this case, in the one-sided drive structure, the state of one end side (driven side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end side (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where a gap is likely to occur between the guidance provided by the member and the guidance provided by the other side member, according to the gaming machine A13, the movable mechanism is biased toward either one end side or the other end side (that is, the driving side or the driven side). Therefore, it is possible to effectively absorb the deviation generated between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, even with one-sided drive and one movable mechanism, the displacement member can be stably displaced, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive means from becoming excessive and the displacement member from stopping.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, a second displacement member is provided which is disposed on the displacement member and is formed so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member. The other end side is driven by the displacement member and the second displacement member is displaced, so that the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is biased toward one end side or the other end side from the center in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member. A featured gaming machine A14.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving (one side). (Drive), so the number of arrangements of the drive means can be 1, and compared with the structure (both sides drive) in which the number of arrangements of the drive means is 2 to drive one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, respectively. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

In this case, in the one-sided drive structure, the state of one end side (driven side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end side (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where a gap is likely to occur between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member, according to the gaming machine A14, by displace the second displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is set closer to the center of the displacement member in the longitudinal direction. Since it can be biased to one end side or the other end side (that is, the driving side or the driven side), the displacement caused by the movement of the center of gravity between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member is caused by the movable mechanism. It is possible to form a state in which it is easy to absorb. As a result, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with one-sided drive, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive means from becoming excessive and the displacement member from stopping.

In addition, as an embodiment in which the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is changed by the displacement of the second displacement member, for example, when the drive of the displacement member by the driving means is started and from the start to a predetermined period, the center of gravity of the displacement member is changed. Move the position closer to (or move away from) the drive side (one end side), while moving the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member closer to the driven side (the other end side) after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of driving the displacement member by the drive means. While the (or away) form or while the displacement member is displaced on the outward path, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is moved closer to (or away from) the drive side (one end side) while the displacement member is displaced on the return path. Is exemplified in a form in which the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer to (or away from) the driven side (the other end side). The latter form is particularly effective when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced (ascended and lowered) along the vertical direction (gravitational direction). That is, for example, focusing on one end side, the state in which one end side is guided by the one side member changes between the ascending time when the displacement is against gravity and the descending time when the displacement is assisted by gravity. Being able to change the position of the center of gravity according to the state is effective for the proper functioning of the movable mechanism. The same applies to the other end side.

The form of the second displacement member includes, for example, a form in which the displacement member is slidably displaced along the longitudinal direction, or a rotating body formed so as to be rotatable and eccentric from the center of rotation thereof. The form of the above is exemplified. Examples of the trajectory of the slide displacement include a straight line, a curved line, and a combination thereof.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, a second displacement member disposed on the displacement member and formed so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member, and a regulatory means for regulating deformation of the movable mechanism. A game machine A15 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, a second displacement member which is disposed on the displacement member and is formed so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member is provided. The effect can be performed by displacing the second displacement member. In this case, since a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, when the second displacement member is displaced, the movable mechanism is deformed, so that the displacement member rattles and the displacement of the second displacement member is displaced. It may be hindered. On the other hand, according to the game machine A15, since the regulating means for regulating the deformation of the movable mechanism is provided, the second displacement member is placed in a state where the displacement of the movable mechanism is regulated and the rattling of the displacement member is suppressed. It can be displaced in a stable state.

The second displacement member includes, for example, a rotating body rotatably arranged on the displacement member, a slide body rotatably disposed on the displacement member, or a shaft support rotatably on the displacement member. An example is a rocking body that swings and displaces the other end side with the one end side as the center.

In the gaming machine A15, when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, the regulating means acts on at least one of the displacement member or the movable mechanism to regulate the deformation of the movable mechanism. A gaming machine A16 characterized by forming.

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effect of the game machine A15, the regulating means acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, so that the movable mechanism of the movable mechanism Since the deformation is regulated, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be regulated by utilizing the displacement of the displacement member. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for regulating the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for making the regulating means function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

As a form of the regulating means that acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated, for example, first, one side member, the other side member, or one of them. A first engaging member is formed on the base member to which the side member and the other side member are attached, and a second engaging member that can be engaged with the first engaging portion is formed on the displacement member. When the displacement ends, the first engaging member and the second engaging member engage with each other to regulate the displacement of the displacement member, thereby restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism. Second, when an insertion member is formed in the one-side member, the other-side member, or the base member to which the one-side member and the other-side member are attached, and the displacement member is displaced to the displacement end, the movable mechanism The form in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted by inserting the insertion member into the gap between one and the other of the deformable members divided by the interposition is thirdly the one-side member, the other-side member, or the other side member. When the first magnet is arranged on the base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached and the second magnet is arranged on the displacement member, and the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement. A form in which the displacement of the displacement member is regulated and the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated by attracting or repelling the first magnet and the second magnet. When formed from a guide portion, a recess is provided in the inner wall surface of the guide groove, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, the guided portion is fitted into the recess of the guide groove. The forms in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted are exemplified respectively. In the third embodiment, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be made of iron (ferromagnetic material).

The gaming machine A15 includes a third displacement member that is displaceably formed between a retracted position and a predetermined position, and the regulating means means that the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position acts on the displacement member. The gaming machine A17 is characterized in that the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted.

According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A15, a third displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the predetermined position is provided. It can be carried out. In this case, the regulating means uses the displacement of the third displacement member because the third displacement member displaced at a predetermined position acts on the displacement member to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. , The deformation of the movable mechanism can be regulated. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for regulating the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the third displacement member can also be used as the driving means for making the regulating means function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

As a form of the regulating means that acts on the displacement member to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, first, the third displacement member displaced at a predetermined position abuts on the displacement member. By doing so, the displacement of the displacement member is regulated, and the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated. Second, a part of the third displacement member displaced at a predetermined position is divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism. The form in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted by being inserted into the gap between one of the deformed members and the other, thirdly, a first magnet is arranged in the third displacement member and the first magnet is arranged. A second magnet is arranged on the displacement member, and when the third displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other, so that the displacement member is displaced. The forms in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated are exemplified. In the third embodiment, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be made of iron (ferromagnetic material).

In particular, in the first form and the second form, the third displacement member includes a plurality of annular forming members, and when the third displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, the plurality of annular forming members are united to form an annular body. It is preferable to form the annular body so that the annular body surrounds the second displacement member (that is, the annular body is arranged around the second displacement member). As a result, in the first embodiment, the outer peripheral side of the second displacement member is brought into contact with the inner peripheral side of the annular body formed by the annular forming member from all sides, thereby restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism and the second. 2 Positioning (centering) of the displacement member can also be performed. The same applies to the third form.

<About the concept of the invention using the urging spring 366 for urging the second rack 364 in a non-parallel manner as an example>
In a gaming machine including a driving means that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, a rack and a pinion that transmit the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the rack. A gaming machine comprising an urging means for imparting an urging force to the rack, wherein the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack. B1.

Here, a gaming machine is known in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted by a rack and a pinion to displace the displacement member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-28226). In this case, for example, in a structure for raising and lowering the displacement member, a larger driving force is required when raising the displacement member than when lowering it due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member. Therefore, an urging means for applying an urging force along the linear motion direction of the rack is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is assisted by the urging force of the urging means.

However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and the pinion as in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack moves linearly (linearly), it is guided along the guide mechanism, and a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. (That is, the rack rattles in the direction of approaching and separating from the pinion), so that the meshing with the pinion is not stable and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied along the linear motion direction of the rack, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force for promoting the rack's posture to be violent.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, a rack and a pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member and an urging means for applying the urging force to the rack are provided, and the urging means applies the urging force to the rack. Since the direction of the urging force is non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack, the urging force of the urging means can be acted as a force in the direction of pressing the rack against the guide mechanism for guiding the rack. As a result, it is possible to make the rack less likely to rattle and prevent the posture from becoming violent. Further, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is made non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack, so that even if the rack posture is violent, the posture can be violent. The urging force of the urging means can be applied as the force in the direction of convergence. Therefore, the meshing of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

In the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed from an elastic body.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed of an elastic body, so that the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is set with respect to the linear motion direction of the rack. The structure for making them non-parallel can be simplified. Further, if it is an elastic body, it is possible to continuously apply an urging force according to the displacement of the rack, so that the rack can be stably urged.

Examples of the elastic body include an elastomer (rubber-like elastic body, urethane, etc.) and an elastic spring (coil spring, torsional spring, leaf spring, etc.). For example, an elastic body is formed from a band-shaped or string-shaped rubber-like elastic body (rubber band) or a metal coil spring, and its longitudinal direction (expansion / contraction direction) is set to be non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack. At the same time, by connecting one end to the rack and the other end to the base member, it is possible to achieve simplification of the structure and stable urging (continuous urging force).

The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer and is arranged in a bent posture.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer and is arranged in a bent posture, which is necessary for the arrangement of the elastic body. Space can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved and the urging force can be secured accordingly. That is, in order to secure the urging force of the elastic body, it is necessary to lengthen the length dimension of the elastic body, but when the length dimension of the elastic body becomes long, the elastic body is arranged due to interference with other members. It becomes difficult to secure the installation space. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, since the elastic body is arranged in a bent posture, the length dimension of the elastic body is lengthened to secure its urging force and avoid interference with other members. Therefore, the space for arranging the elastic body can be secured.

The bent posture of the elastic body means that the bending is included in a part or all of the elastic body. Therefore, the shape of the elastic body arranged in the bent posture is, for example, a linear portion and a linear portion. Examples include a shape in which curved portions are connected to each other (that is, a "dogleg" shape in which the bent portion is rounded) and a shape in which the entire portion is curved (that is, a "C" shape). Will be done.

In the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed from a magnet.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed from a magnet, so that a stable urging force can be applied to the rack for a long period of time. That is, in an elastic body, deterioration (sagging) occurs due to repeated movements of the rack, and the urging force is changed. However, like the gaming machine B4, the urging force is applied for a long period of time by using a magnet. Can be constant. As a result, the effect of making the direction of the urging force non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack can be stably exhibited for a long period of time.

In the case where the urging means is formed from magnets, the first magnet is arranged in the rack, the second magnet is arranged on the movement locus of the rack, and the first magnet and the first magnet are arranged. An example is a configuration in which an urging force is applied to the rack by attracting or repelling the magnets of 2. In this case, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be made of iron (ferromagnetic material). Further, the number of the first magnet and the second magnet (including the iron member) arranged is arbitrary, and may be one or a plurality.

In the gaming machine B4, the urging means has a range in which the urging force applied to the rack exceeds the reference value and a range in which the urging force applied to the rack is equal to or less than the reference value in the range in which the rack moves linearly. A gaming machine B5 characterized by forming.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the urging means is the range in which the urging force exceeding the reference value is applied to the rack and the urging means applied to the rack in the range in which the rack moves directly. Since a range in which the force is equal to or less than the reference value is formed, the urging force applied to the rack can be set to the urging force suitable for the state of the rack.

For example, in the first range, by applying an urging force exceeding the reference value to the rack, the rack is less likely to rattle and the posture is suppressed from being violent, while in the second range, it is suppressed. By setting the urging force applied to the rack to be equal to or less than the reference value, it is possible to reduce the urging force (magnetic force) becoming a resistance to driving the rack and suppress the energy consumption of the driving means.

In this case, the first magnet is arranged in the rack, and the range (first range) in which the second magnet is arranged and the second magnet are arranged on the movement locus of the rack. When the rack (first magnet) passes through the first range, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other. By matching, the rack is given an urging force that exceeds the reference value, while when the rack (first magnet) passes through the second range, the magnets that interact with the first magnet An example is a configuration in which no urging force is applied to the rack (or the applied urging force is equal to or less than a reference value) because it does not exist (or has a small action). As described above, in this case as well, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be made of iron (ferromagnetic material). Further, as in the above case, the number of the first magnet and the second magnet (including the iron member) to be arranged is arbitrary and may be one or a plurality.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is a direction for generating a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack close to the tooth surface of the pinion. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack closer to the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, the gap between the tooth surface of the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion can be suppressed. Therefore, the gap between the tooth surfaces suppresses the occurrence of a time lag when transmitting the driving force from the pinion to the rack (or vice versa) to improve the responsiveness and the collision between the tooth surfaces at the initial stage of meshing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the tooth surface from being worn and the tooth surface from being damaged. Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be closed, so that the meshing state between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is a direction for generating a force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is a force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the tooth surface of the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion from becoming too clogged and excessive pressure for meshing, and as a result, from the pinion to the rack (or vice versa). It is possible to suppress the resistance when transmitting the driving force to.

In any of the game machines B1 to B7, in the range in which the rack moves linearly, a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack closer to the tooth surface of the pinion in the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is applied. The first range as the direction of generation and the second range of the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means as the direction of generating the force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. A game machine B8 characterized in that and is formed.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means can be changed within the range in which the rack moves directly. The meshing state of the rack and the pinion can be changed to the optimum state depending on the state of the displacement member, the rack or the driving means.

For example, by applying the first range to the initial stage (that is, the stage where the displacement of the displacement member is started) in the transient state when the transmission of the driving force is started, the tooth surfaces are brought close to each other and the driving force is started. The second range is applied to the stage where the transmission of the driving force is stable and in a steady state (that is, the stage where the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed). As a result, the tooth surfaces can be separated from each other and the resistance can be suppressed.

Alternatively, the opposite may be true. That is, in the initial stage in the transient state when the transmission of the driving force is started (that is, the stage in which the displacement of the displacement member is started), the inertial force is large to start the displacement of the displacement member in the stopped state, and the driving force is driven. When the load of the means becomes large, by applying the second range to the initial stage, the tooth surfaces can be separated from each other and the resistance can be suppressed, so that the load of the driving means can be suppressed. On the other hand, at the stage where the transmission of the driving force is stable and in a steady state (that is, the stage where the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed), the displacement speed of the displacement member becomes high, so that when the rack rattles, it becomes The effect of rattling is transmitted to the displacement member, and the stable displacement of the displacement member is hindered. Even when the displacement speed of the displacement member is high, the displacement can be stabilized. In particular, the latter configuration has a structure in which a long displacement member erected between one side member and the other side member is displaced by being guided by one side member and the other side member on one end side and the other end side, respectively. It becomes effective in.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, one side member and the other side member are provided at predetermined intervals, and the displacement member is erected between the one side member and the other side member and is said to be one side. The gaming machine B9, wherein one end side and the other end side are guided and displaced by the member and the other side member, respectively.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, one side member and the other side member arranged at predetermined intervals are provided, and between the one side member and the other side member. Since the displacement member is displaced by guiding one side member and the other side member to one side member and the other side member, respectively, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is the direction of the direct motion of the rack. The effect of making it non-parallel to the above can be effectively exerted.

Here, in such a structure, if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable, and not only the load of the driving means becomes excessive, but also the displacement member. There is also a risk of causing a stoppage. That is, in the conventional product in which the posture of the rack tends to be violent, due to the violence of the rack, a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the other-side member, and the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is not parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack, so that the rack is less likely to rattle. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the violence of the posture. Further, even if the posture of the rack is violent once, the urging force of the urging means can be acted as a force in the direction of converging the violence of the posture. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the displacement of the displacement member by suppressing the displacement between the guide by the one-side member and the other-side member due to the rampage of the rack.

The gaming machine B9 is provided with a movable mechanism that is deformably formed, and the movable mechanism is interposed between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. B10.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, a movable mechanism formed to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is provided in the displacement member, if the movable mechanism functions when the displacement member is displaced, the deformation of the movable mechanism acts as an external force on the rack, causing the rack to rattle. .. Therefore, the posture of the rack becomes violent, which causes instability of the meshing of the rack and the pinion and a decrease in durability. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is not parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack, so that the external force acting with the deformation of the movable mechanism is applied. On the other hand, the rack can be made less likely to rattle because it can be opposed by the urging force given by the urging means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the posture of the rack from becoming violent, stabilize the meshing of the rack and the pinion, and improve the durability.

<Concept of the invention using the urging spring 366 arranged in a bent posture as an example>
The base member, the target member displaceably arranged on the base member, one end is directly or indirectly connected to the target member, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the base member. A gaming machine C1 comprising a urging means and the urging means being arranged in a bent posture.

Here, the base member, the target member displaceably arranged on the base member, the urging means having one end connected to the target member and the other end connected to the base member, and the urging means. A gaming machine including an opposing member that is sandwiched and arranged to face the base member is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-28226). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving means, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the urging force of the urging means.

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to secure the urging force because the space in which the urging means can be arranged is limited. That is, in order to secure the urging force of the urging means, it is necessary to secure a sufficient length dimension, but it is necessary to arrange the urging means while avoiding interference with other members. It was difficult to make the length dimension sufficiently long.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the urging means is arranged in a bent posture, it is possible to easily arrange the urging means while avoiding interference with other members, so that a sufficient length dimension can be secured. It is possible to easily secure the urging force.

The bent posture of the elastic body means that the bending is included in a part or all of the elastic body. Therefore, the shape of the elastic body arranged in the bent posture is, for example, a linear portion and a linear portion. Examples include a shape in which curved portions are connected to each other (that is, a "dogleg" shape in which the bent portion is rounded) and a shape in which the entire portion is curved (that is, a "C" shape). Will be done.

The gaming machine C1 includes an opposing member that is arranged to face the base member with the urging means interposed therebetween, and the opposing member is formed with an opening in a region including at least one of one end or the other end of the urging member. A gaming machine C2 characterized by having an opening.

Here, when the urging means is arranged in a bent posture, it is possible to easily secure the arrangement space, but it is difficult to maintain the bent posture, and the urging means is elastic in the assembly process. There was a problem of being struck (jumping with its own elastic resilience). Therefore, in the assembling process, while pressing the urging means with one hand so as to maintain the bent posture of the urging means, the work of connecting the urging means to the target member or the base member with the other hand is performed. It had to be done and was complicated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, an opposing member arranged to face the base member with the urging means interposed therebetween is provided, and the opposing member includes one end of the urging member or Since the opening is formed in the region including at least one of the other ends, even after connecting one end or the other end of the urging means and disposing the facing member, the opening of the facing member can be opened. The other of one end or the other end of the urging means can be connected therethrough. That is, by arranging the opposing members so as to face the base member with the urging means interposed therebetween, it is possible to prevent the urging means from being repelled. As a result, the work of connecting one end or the other end of the urging means can be facilitated, and the assembling work can be simplified.

Further, even when the facing member is arranged to face the base member with the urging means interposed therebetween, the opening is formed in the facing member, so that the space between the facing member and the urging means is increased accordingly. It is possible to suppress the sliding of the above and reduce the occurrence of resistance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic deformation of the urging means from being hindered, so that the urging force can be stably applied to the target member. Further, even when one material has a lower strength than the other, for example, when the urging means is formed of a metal coil spring and the opposing member is formed of a resin material, those materials are used. It is possible to prevent one member from being worn due to sliding and dust generated by the wear from entering electronic devices such as mechanical moving parts and sensors and having an adverse effect.

In the gaming machine C2, the facing member is provided with an opening in a region including one end of the urging member and a region including the other end, respectively.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the facing member is formed with openings in each of the region including one end of the urging member and the region including the other end, so that the urging means An opposing member can be left at the bent portion of the. Therefore, it is possible to press the portion necessary for maintaining the bent posture of the urging means with the facing member while ensuring the maximum formation region of the opening. As a result, simplification of the assembly work and suppression of sliding resistance and generation of dust can be effectively achieved.

In the gaming machine C3, the facing member is a communication passage that communicates an opening formed in the region including one end of the urging means and an opening formed in the region including the other end of the urging means. Is provided, and the communication passage is formed as an opening having a size that allows the urging means to pass through, and the urging means is arranged on the bent outer side of the bent portion of the urging means arranged in the bent posture. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being located.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, an opening formed in the region including one end of the urging means and an opening formed in the region including the other end of the urging means are provided. It is provided with a communication passage for communication, and the communication passage is formed as an opening having a size that allows the urging means to pass through, and is arranged on the bending outer side of the bending portion of the urging means arranged in a bent posture. Since it is located, first, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to each of the target member or the base member through each opening of the facing member, and then through each opening and the communication passage of the facing member. , The urging means can be placed between the base member and the opposing member (ie, after fixing both ends of the urging means, a bent posture can be formed), whereby the urging means is repelled. While suppressing this, the urging means can be easily arranged in a bent posture.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the gaming machine C1 includes a stop plate member arranged to face the base member with the bent portion of the urging means arranged in the bent posture.

Here, when the urging means is arranged in a bent posture, it is possible to easily secure the arrangement space, but it is difficult to maintain the bent posture, and the urging means is elastic in the assembly process. There was a problem of being struck (jumping with its own elastic resilience). Therefore, in the assembling process, while pressing the urging means with one hand so as to maintain the bent posture of the urging means, the work of connecting the urging means to the target member or the base member with the other hand is performed. It had to be done and was complicated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, a stop plate member is provided so as to face the base member with the bent portion of the urging means arranged in the bent posture. Therefore, first, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to each of the target member or the base member, and then the intermediate portion of the urging means is locked to the stop plate member (opposite of the base member and the stop plate member). It can be placed in between (ie, it can form a bent posture after fixing both ends of the urging means), thereby bending the urging means while suppressing it from being repelled. It can be easily arranged in a slingshot posture. Therefore, the assembly work can be simplified.

Further, since the region where the stop plate member faces is only the bent portion of the urging means and the region excluding the bent portion of the urging means is open, sliding when the urging means is elastically deformed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of resistance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic deformation of the urging means from being hindered, so that the urging force can be stably applied to the target member. In addition, since the area other than the bent portion of the urging means is open, the mating member wears due to sliding, and the dust generated due to the wear is mechanically movable parts and electronic devices such as sensors. It is possible to suppress intrusion and adverse effects.

The gaming machine C5 includes a rotary contact member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is rotatably formed so as to come into contact with the urging means, and the urging means is located between one end and the other end. A part of the rotary contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotary contact member to be arranged in a bent posture, and the stop plate member is flanged outward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface of the rotary contact member. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that it is integrally formed with the rotary contact member as a protruding flange portion.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, a rotary contact member that brings the outer peripheral surface into contact with the urging means is rotatably formed in order to bring the urging means into a bent posture. When the urging means is elastically deformed (for example, expanded and contracted), the rotary contact member and the stop plate member (flange) can also be rotated along with the elastic deformation, and the elastic deformation of the urging means can be smoothly performed. Can be done. That is, in order to make the urging means into a bent posture, the member that abuts on the urging means (corresponding to the rotary contact member) and the urging member are suppressed so as not to be repelled (they do not jump due to their own elastic recovery force). Compared with the case where the member to be kept (corresponding to the stop plate member) is fixed, the sliding resistance generated between the member and the urging means can be suppressed. Further, since the sliding can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the wear caused by the sliding and the adverse effect of the dust generated by the wear.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a displacement contact member that is displaceably arranged on the base member and is formed so as to be in contact with the urging means is provided, and the displacement contact member is urged. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the urging means is arranged in a bent posture by being displaced while being in contact with a part between the one end and the other end of the means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a displacement contact member displaceable on the base member is provided, and the displacement contact member serves as one end of the urging means. Since the urging means is arranged in a bent posture by being displaced while being in contact with a part of the urging means, the assembling work of the urging means can be facilitated. That is, by first connecting one end and the other end of the urging means to each of the target member or the base member and then displace the displacement contact member, the urging means can be in a bent posture. Therefore, since both ends of the urging means can be fixed and then a bent posture can be formed, it is possible to easily dispose of the urging means in the bent posture while suppressing the urging means from being repelled. ..

In the gaming machine C7, the base member includes a guide means for guiding the displacement contact member, and the guide means includes a first guide portion extending in a direction in which the urging means is in a bent posture, and a first guide portion thereof. The gaming machine C8 is provided with a second guide portion that is folded back from the terminal side of the guide portion and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the urging means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C7, the guide means for guiding the displacement member is a first guide portion extending in a direction in which the biasing means is in a bent posture, and a terminal of the first guide portion thereof. Since it is provided with a second guide portion that is folded back from the side and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the urging means, the displacement contact member can be displaced along the first guide portion of the guide means to provide the urging means. A bent posture can be formed, and by arranging the displacement contact member on the second guide portion of the guide means, the displacement contact member is pressed and held against the end of the second guide portion by the elastic recovery force of the urging means. be able to. That is, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only for urging the target member but also for holding (fixing) the displacement contact member, a member for fixing the displacement contact member (for example, for example). There is no need to prepare a fastening screw) separately, and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and the assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a pair of the target members is displaceably arranged on the base member, and one end of the urging means is directly attached to one of the target members of the pair of target members. The gaming machine C9 is specifically or indirectly connected, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the other target member of the pair of target members.

Here, the base member, the target member displaceably arranged on the base member, one end is directly or indirectly connected to the target member, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the base member. It is known that a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on a base member and the pair of target members are urged by different urging means. According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving means, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the urging force of the urging means.

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since each target member is urged by a separate urging means, the magnitude of the urging force applied to each target member is large due to individual differences in the separate urging means. There was a problem that the variation occurred.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, when a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are attached to one and the other of the pair of target members. Since they are connected to each other, the urging force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform. That is, when the urging means of 2 is provided, the urging force applied to the pair of target members varies due to the variation in the characteristics of each urging means (dimensional tolerance, etc.). By applying the urging force to each of the pair of target members, it is possible to suppress the variation in the urging force applied to each target member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the pair of target members from fluctuating.

In this case, a pair of target members may be arranged on one base member, or the base member is divided and the pair of target members are arranged on different base members. It may be in the form of being.

Further, the gaming machine C9 is erected between the one-side member and the other-side member arranged at predetermined intervals, and the one-side member and the other-side member, and one end side and the other-side member of the one-side member and the other-side member. It is particularly effective to apply it to a gaming machine provided with a displacement member whose other end side is guided and displaced, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the gaming machine G1 to a configuration for guiding one end side of the displacement member and a configuration for guiding the other end side. In such a gaming machine, a gap is likely to occur between the guidance on one end side of the displacement member and the guidance on the other end side of the displacement member, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. By applying, the urging force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and the variation in displacement thereof can be suppressed, so that the guidance on one end side and the guidance on the other end side of the displacement member can be made uniform. .. As a result, the displacement member can be stably displaced by suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned displacement.

The gaming machine C9 includes a connecting member that is connected to the base member, and one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the urging means is formed. It is characterized in that the urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connecting member is pressed against the base member and the connection between the base member and the connecting member is maintained by being brought into contact with the connecting member. The gaming machine C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the intermediate portion of the urging means whose one end and the other end are connected to each of the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as a base. Since the urging force is applied so as to press against the member and maintain the connection between the base member and the connecting member, the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, by such temporary fixing, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when attaching these base members and connecting members to the attachment target. Further, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging force of the target member but also as the fixing force of the connecting member to the base member, a member for fixing the connecting member to the base member (for example). , Fastening screw) does not need to be prepared separately, and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and the assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, a displacement contact member that is displaceably arranged on the base member and is in contact with the urging means to form a bent posture of the urging means, and a displacement contact member thereof. A contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member is provided, and the displacement contact member is displaced by the driving force of the contact member driving means, so that the bent state of the urging means can be changed. A gaming machine C11 characterized in that it is said to be.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the pachinko machine C10 is displaceably arranged on the base member and abuts on the urging means to form a bent posture of the urging means. A displacement contact member and a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement contact member are provided, and the displacement contact member is displaced by the driving force of the contact member driving means to provide a biasing means. Since the bending state can be changed, the urging state by the urging means can be adjusted to be more appropriate according to the state of the target member to which the urging force is applied.

As the displacement direction of the displacement contact member, first, the direction connecting one end of the urging means (position connected to the target member) and the displacement contact member is not changed, and the one end of the urging means is used. The direction in which the distance between the displacement contact member is changed is second, the distance between one end of the urging means and the displacement contact member is not changed, and one end of the urging means and the displacement contact member. Thirdly, a direction in which the first and second directions are combined is exemplified as a direction in which the direction of connecting the two is changed.

In the case of the first direction, the preload of the urging means (the load applied to the urging means in the assembled state) without changing the direction of the urging force applied to the target member from the urging means. The size can be adjusted. That is, the apparent spring constant of the urging means can be adjusted (increased or decreased). Therefore, the magnitude of the urging force applied by the urging means according to the amount of displacement of the target member from the reference position is controlled according to the state of the target member (for example, posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). be able to. For example, when the target member is in the upper end position, the preload of the urging means is increased, and the force required to maintain the target member in the upper end position is assisted by the urging force of the urging means, while the target member At the time of displacement, the preload of the urging means can be reduced to prevent the urging force of the urging means from becoming a resistance when the target member is displaced.

In the case of the second direction, the direction of the urging force applied to the target member by the urging means can be changed without changing the magnitude of the preload of the urging means. Therefore, the direction of the urging force applied to the target member by the urging means can be switched between a direction that coincides with the displacement direction of the target member and a direction that is non-parallel, or the degree of non-parallelity can be increased or decreased. It can be controlled according to a state (for example, a posture, a displacement speed, or a displacement position). For example, in the initial stage in the transient state where the displacement of the target member is started, the behavior of the target member becomes unstable, and the degree of disparity in the direction of the urging force is increased to prevent the target member from rampaging. On the other hand, at the stage where the displacement velocity of the target member reaches a constant state in a steady state, the behavior of the target member is stabilized, and the degree of disparity in the direction of the urging force is reduced to reduce the resistance. As a result, the energy required to drive the target member can be suppressed.

The configuration of the gaming machine C11 is particularly effective when the target member is formed as a rack meshed with the pinion. This is because the direction of the urging force applied to the target member can be changed from the urging means, so that the meshing state (engagement state) between the pinion and the rack can be controlled.

Further, in the gaming machine C11, the case where the displacement contact member is driven by the driving force of the contact member driving means has been described, but the contact member driving means is omitted and the displacement contact member is elastically supported so as to be displaceable. You may. In this case, the displacement contact member is displaced according to the state of the target member so that the direction of the preload or (and) urging force of the urging means can be adjusted, and the displacement contact is performed by the elastic recovery force in the elastic support. The member can be returned to the initial position. As the structure of the elastic support, for example, the elastic body is connected to the displacement contact member which is displaceable along the guide groove provided in the base member, and the displacement of the displacement contact member and the initial stage due to the elastic deformation of the elastic body. A structure that enables return to the position, an outer cylinder of the bush in which the inner cylinder and the outer cylinder are connected by a rubber-like elastic body are arranged on the base member, and a displacement contact member is arranged on the inner cylinder. An example is a structure that enables the displacement contact member to be displaced and returned to the initial position by elastic deformation of the bush. According to the latter structure, the displaceable direction of the displacement contact member is not limited to one direction, so that the displacement direction of the displacement contact member can be the third direction described above.

Further, the contact member driving means may be omitted, and the displacement contact member may be formed so as to be manually adjustable. In this case, the preloading or (and) of the urging means is performed according to the secular change of each member (for example, the decrease in the spring constant due to the sagging (deterioration) of the urging means, the wear of the tooth surface of the rack and the pinion, etc.). ) The direction of the urging force can be adjusted. As a structure that allows the arrangement position of the displacement contact member to be manually adjusted, for example, the displacement contact member can be displaced along the guide groove provided in the base member, and the displacement contact member is fixed to the guide groove. The preload or the like is adjusted according to the position of the support hole in which the displacement contact member is arranged by providing a plurality of support holes to which the displacement contact member can be attached and detached. The structure and the like are exemplified.

<Concept of the invention using the second rack 364 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a driving means that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, a rack and a pinion that transmit the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and a rack thereof. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the guiding means for guiding the rack is provided, and the guiding means guides the rack in a displaceable state along the tooth surface of the pinion.

Here, a gaming machine is known in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted by a rack and a pinion to displace the displacement member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-75550). Since the rack and pinion can convert the rotational motion into a linear motion, they are often used as a mechanism for linearly displaces the displacement member by the driving force (rotational motion) of the motor.

However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and the pinion as in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack moves linearly (linearly), it is guided along the guide mechanism, and a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. (That is, the rack rattles in the direction of approaching and separating from the pinion), so that the meshing with the pinion is not stable and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, a rack and a pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member and a guiding means for guiding the rack are provided, and the guiding means can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Since the rack is guided in such a state, even if the posture of the rack is disturbed, it is easy to maintain the meshing between the rack and the pinion to be constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

Note that the rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion when the linear tooth surface of the rack is in contact with the arcuate tooth surface of the pinion in the axial view of the pinion (the straight line of the rack tooth surface). Means the operation of rotating the rack around the axis of the pinion while maintaining the state where is tangent to the arc of the pinion tooth surface).

The gaming machine D1 includes a base member on which the rack and pinion are arranged, and the guiding means rotates on a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and the guided portion thereof. The gaming machine D2 is characterized by comprising a projecting portion that is slidably inserted and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the guiding means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion with the guided portion extending to the rack along the tooth surface of the rack. Since it is provided with a projecting portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided portion of the rack as well as being installed, when the projecting portion is slid along the guided portion, it protrudes in the guided portion. The relative rotation of the installation allows the rack to be displaced along the guided portion while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even if the posture of the rack is disturbed, it is easy to keep the mesh between the rack and the pinion constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

In this case, in the guide means, since the guided portion is formed in the rack and the projecting portion is formed in the region of the base member facing the rack, the guided portion and the projecting portion are formed on the moving locus of the rack. Can be placed in. That is, it is not necessary to form a portion for allowing the rack to be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion outside the outer shape of the rack, and in a dead space where other members cannot be arranged in order to avoid interference with the rack. Since it can be arranged, space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

The guided portion may be a concave groove formed in a surface facing the base member of the rack, or may be an elongated hole-shaped opening formed in the rack. In this case, the width dimension of the guided portion is preferably constant along the longitudinal direction, and the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion is substantially the same as the width dimension of the guided portion or a circular cross section having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the guided portion. preferable. This is because it is easier to make the meshing when the rack is moved linearly while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. However, the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion may be an elliptical cross-section, a polygonal cross-section, or the like. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion may be any shape as long as it can slide along the guided portion and can rotate in the guided portion.

The gaming machine D1 includes a base member on which the rack and pinion are arranged, and the guide means is projected from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion with the rack sandwiched between the rack and the side surface of the rack. A first regulating portion that can be brought into contact with the rack and a second regulating portion formed on the base member to regulate the displacement of the rack in the width direction are provided, and the second regulating portion allows it. The gaming machine D3, wherein the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction is larger than the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction allowed between the first regulation unit and the pinion.

According to the gaming machine D3, the guiding means has a first regulating portion projecting from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion across the rack, and a second regulating portion for regulating the displacement of the rack in the width direction. Since it is provided with a regulating section, when the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion, the first regulating section and the second regulating section regulate the displacement of the rack in the width direction to displace the rack in the linear motion direction. be able to.

In this case, the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction is larger than the amount of displacement allowed between the first regulating portion and the pinion, so that the amount of displacement allowed by the second regulating portion is larger. In addition to the effect of the machine D1, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even if the posture of the rack is disturbed, it is easy to keep the mesh between the rack and the pinion constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

Further, since it is not necessary to provide the rack with a groove or a guided portion as an opening, the rigidity of the rack can be ensured and the durability thereof can be improved accordingly. Further, by ensuring the rigidity of the rack, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the rack when it is driven by the rotation of the pinion, and from this point as well, it is possible to easily maintain the meshing between the rack and the pinion at a constant level.

It is preferable that the first regulating portion is projected from the base member as a rod-shaped body. This is because when the first contact portion abuts on the side surface of the rack to regulate the displacement of the rack, the rack can be easily displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Here, examples of the cross-sectional shape of the first regulating portion (rod-shaped body) include a circular shape, an elliptical shape, a polygonal shape, and a shape in which these are partially combined. In this case, the cross-sectional shape of the first regulating portion is preferably a shape in which the side surface on the side facing (contacting) the rack is curved in a circular arc shape. This is because the resistance can be reduced and the displacement of the rack can be less likely to be hindered when the displacement is regulated by contacting the side surface of the rack.

A gaming machine D4, wherein any of the gaming machines D1 to D3 is provided with an urging means for imparting an urging force to the rack.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, an urging means for imparting an urging force to the rack is provided, and the urging force is used to assist the driving force of the driving means. can do. For example, in a structure that raises and lowers a displacement member, when the displacement member is raised, a larger driving force is required than when the displacement member is lowered due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member. As a result, the urging force is applied to the rack, so that the driving force of the driving means can be assisted accordingly.

On the other hand, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and the pinion, the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack is guided by the guiding means, a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guiding means and the rack, and the posture of the rack is disturbed by the gap. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied to the rack, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force for promoting the posture of the rack to be violent. On the other hand, in the present invention, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, in a structure in which the urging force by the urging means is applied to the rack, even if the posture of the rack is disturbed, it is possible to easily maintain the meshing between the rack and the pinion to be constant, and it is possible to stabilize the transmission of the driving force. can.

As the urging means, for example, an elastic spring (coil spring, torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.) or an elastomer (rubber-like elastic body, urethane, etc.) is used as an urging force, or the magnetic force of a magnet is used. Examples include those used as an energizing force.

In the gaming machine D4, the gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is not parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack, so that the rack is mounted on the rack. The urging force of the urging means can be acted as a force in the direction of pressing the guide means. As a result, it is possible to make the rack less likely to rattle and prevent the posture from becoming violent.

Further, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means is made non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack, so that even if the rack posture is violent, the posture can be violent. The urging force of the urging means can be applied as the force in the direction of convergence. Therefore, the meshing of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

The linear motion direction of the rack means a direction in which the rack driven by the rotation of the pinion is displaced, and is a direction along the tooth surface of the rack. In this case, in the gaming machine D5, since the rack can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion (the rack can rotate about the axis of the pinion), the linear motion direction of the rack changes according to the rotation position of the rack. Will be done.

The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 is provided with a linear motion regulating means for regulating the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D5, a linear motion regulating means for regulating the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction is provided. , The driving force required for the driving means can be reduced. For example, in a structure that raises and lowers a displacement member, in order to stop and hold the displacement member at an ascending position, it is necessary to resist the gravity acting on the displacement member, so that the driving force required for the driving means increases. Since the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction can be regulated by the linear motion regulating means, the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced (or the driving is stopped) accordingly. As a result, the energy consumption of the driving means when the displacement member is held at a predetermined position (for example, an ascending position) can be suppressed.

The game machine D6 includes an urging means for applying an urging force to the rack, and the linear motion regulating means can engage with a first engaging portion formed on the rack and the first engaging portion thereof. A second engaging portion formed and formed on the guide means is provided, and the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack. The gaming machine D7, which is in the direction of engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, the linear motion regulating means is formed so as to be engaged with the first engaging portion formed in the rack and the first engaging portion, and serves as a guiding means. The second engaging portion is provided, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack, and the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are provided. Since it is the direction in which the engaging portion is engaged, the engagement and disengagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be performed with the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction.

That is, the rack can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion (rotatable about the axis of the pinion), and the urging force of the urging means urges the rack in the direction of displacement along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, for example, when the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is formed as a concave-convex shape engagement, when the rack is displaced to a predetermined position in the linear motion direction, the rack is concave and convex. By matching the positions with and, the rack can be rotated by the urging force of the urging means to form an engagement of a concave-convex shape (first engaging portion and second engaging portion) (convex is inserted into the concave). , The engagement can be maintained by the urging force of the urging means. On the other hand, when the pinion is driven from that state, the rack is rotated in the direction of disengaging the concave-convex shape while resisting the urging force of the urging means, so that the concave-convex shape is disengaged (from the concave). The convex can be pulled out), and the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction.

The gaming machine D7 includes a base member on which the rack and pinion are arranged, and the guiding means rotates on a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and the guided portion thereof. The linear motion regulating means includes a projecting portion that is slidably inserted and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion, and the first engaging portion is the same. The gaming machine D8 is formed by a recess formed in an inner wall surface of a guided portion of the guiding means, and the second engaging portion is formed by a protruding portion of the guiding means.

According to the gaming machine D8, the guiding means is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and the guided portion and facing the axis of the pinion. Since it is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the base member at the position where the pachinko machine D2 is used, the same effect as that of the gaming machine D2 is obtained. In this case, since the first engaging portion of the linear motion regulating means is formed in the guided portion of the guiding means, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, space efficiency can be improved, and the linear motion regulation is performed. Since the second engaging portion of the means is formed by the projecting portion of the guide means, the number of parts can be reduced by the amount of the parts that are also used. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size and product cost.

The game machine D7 includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means is projected from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion with the rack sandwiched between the rack and the side surface of the rack. A first regulating portion that can be brought into contact with the rack and a second regulating portion formed on the base member to regulate the displacement of the rack in the width direction are provided, and the second regulating portion allows it. The amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction is made larger than the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction allowed between the first regulating portion and the pinion, and the linear motion regulating means is the first section. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the joint portion is formed by a recess recessed in the side surface of the rack, and the second engaging portion is formed by the second regulating portion of the guide means.

According to the gaming machine D9, the guiding means is projected from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion across the rack, and is in contact with the side surface of the rack. A second regulating portion formed on the base member to regulate the displacement of the slingshot is provided, and the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack allowed by the second regulating portion is between the first regulating portion and the pinion. Since the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is larger than the allowable amount of displacement, the same effect as that of the gaming machine D3 is obtained. In this case, since the first engaging portion of the linear motion regulating means is formed on the side surface of the rack, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, space efficiency can be improved, and the linear motion regulating means can be used first. Since the two engaging portions are formed by the second regulating portion of the guide means, the number of parts can be reduced by the amount of the parts that are also used. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size and product cost.

The gaming machine D6 includes a base member on which the rack and pinion are arranged, and the guiding means includes a guided portion as a groove extending in the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and a cover thereof. The linear motion regulating means is provided with a projecting portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide portion and is projected from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion. A first engaging portion formed by deepening a part of the recessed depth in the guided portion is provided, and the tip end side of the protruding portion of the guiding means is formed to be engageable with the first engaging portion. The gaming machine D10 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the guiding means can rotate to the guided portion as a concave groove extending in the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and the guided portion. Since it is slidably inserted and has a projecting portion projecting from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion, the same effect as that of the gaming machine D2 is obtained. In this case, the linear motion regulating means includes a first engaging portion formed by deepening a part of the recessed depth in the guided portion of the guiding means, and the guiding means is projected from the first engaging portion. Since the tip end side of the portion is formed so as to be engageable, the first engaging portion and the projecting member can be engaged and disengaged with the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction.

Further, since the first engaging portion of the linear motion regulating means is formed by partially deepening the concave groove (guided portion) of the rack, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency is improved. In addition to being able to achieve this, since the portion for engaging with the first engaging portion is formed by the projecting portion of the guide means, it is possible to combine the parts and reduce the number of parts by that amount. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size and product cost.

In the gaming machine D10, a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which the ball is urged in the protruding direction by a spring is provided on the tip end side of the projecting portion, and the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is engaged with the first engaging portion. Is preferable. This is because the engagement between the first engaging portion and the tip end side of the projecting portion and the disengagement thereof can be smoothly performed.

Further, in the gaming machine D10, the gaming machine may be configured as follows. That is, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the rack is provided, and the transmitting means is attached to the first engaging portion at least in a state where the protruding portion is engaged with the first engaging portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a large driving force can be transmitted from the driving means to the rack even when the protruding portion is engaged.

According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D10, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the rack is first engaged when the projecting portion is engaged with the first engaging portion. Since a large driving force can be transmitted from the driving means to the rack even when the protrusion is engaged with the portion, the engagement between the first engaging portion and the protrusion can be smoothly disengaged. Can be done.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged and a cover member arranged so as to face the rack and the pinion with the rack and the pinion in between are provided, and the base member and the cover member are provided. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the displacement of the rack is regulated by the facing surfaces of the rack, and a connecting portion for connecting the base member and the cover member is arranged in the vicinity of the rack.

Here, the rack and the pinion are arranged on the base member, the cover member is covered with the base member, and the thickness direction of the rack (that is, the base member and the cover member) is formed by the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member. A gaming machine having a structure that regulates displacement in the opposite direction) is known. In this case, if the distance between the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member is unstable, the regulation of displacement of the rack in the thickness direction becomes insufficient, which adversely affects the meshing state with the pinion. However, if the number of connecting portions for connecting the base member and the cover member is increased in order to stabilize the distance between the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member, the product cost increases accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, the connecting portion for connecting the base member and the cover member is arranged in the vicinity of the rack, so that the base member and the cover The distance between the facing surfaces of the members, which contributes to the regulation of the displacement of the rack, can be stabilized intensively. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of arrangements of the connecting portions, reduce the product cost, sufficiently regulate the displacement of the rack in the thickness direction, and stabilize the meshing state with the pinion.

In the gaming machine D11, the rack is provided with an opening formed as an elongated hole-shaped opening, and the connecting portion is inserted through the opening of the rack.

According to the gaming machine D12, the rack is provided with an opening formed in an elongated hole shape, and the connecting portion is inserted through the opening of the rack, so that the base member and the cover member are connected at the position closest to the rack. It can be connected by a part. Therefore, the spacing between the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member can be stabilized in the most suitable region for regulating the displacement of the rack. As a result, the number of connecting parts is minimized to reduce the product cost, and even with the minimum number of connecting parts, the regulation of displacement in the thickness direction of the rack is maximized to ensure the meshing state with the pinion. Can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine D12, the guiding means is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guided portion formed as an elongated hole-shaped opening in the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and the guided portion. In addition, a projecting portion projecting from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion is provided, the opening is formed by the guided portion, and the connecting portion is formed by the projecting portion. A gaming machine D13 characterized in that it is formed.

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D12, the guiding means can be rotated and slidable to the guided portion extending to the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and the guided portion. Since it is provided with a projecting portion that is inserted and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion, the same effect as that of the gaming machine D2 is obtained. In this case, since the opening is formed by the guided portion and the connecting portion is formed by the projecting portion, it is possible to improve the space efficiency and reduce the product cost. That is, since the connecting portion is arranged by using the guided portion (opening) formed in the rack, it is not necessary to dispose the connecting portion outside the outer shape of the rack. Members can be arranged outside the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. Further, the guided portion and the projecting portion constituting the guiding means for guiding the displacement of the rack connect and fix the base member and the cover member to each other, so that the connecting portion and the opening for inserting the connecting portion are inserted. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The gaming machine D12 or D13 is characterized in that the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is restricted by contacting the connecting portion with the end of the opening.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D12 or D13, the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is regulated by the contacting portion with the end of the opening, so that the space efficiency is improved. Product costs can be reduced. For example, a structure is conceivable in which a stopper wall that contacts the side surface of the rack is erected from the base member, and the side surface of the rack is brought into contact with the stopper wall to regulate the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction. In the structure, since the stopper wall is formed, the space where other members can be arranged is reduced outside the outer shape of the rack. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D14, since it is not necessary to dispose the connecting portion corresponding to the stopper wall outside the outer shape of the rack, other members can be arranged outside the outer shape of the rack accordingly. , Space efficiency can be improved. Further, in addition to the function of connecting and fixing the base member and the cover member, the connecting portion can also have a stopper function for regulating the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction. The number of points can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine D14, the base member and the cover member are formed of a resin material, the connecting portion is erected from one of the base member or the cover member, and the erection tip side thereof is the base member or the cover member. On the other hand, in a state of being fastened with a metal screw and fastened with the screw, the metal screw is embedded inside the connecting portion along the erection direction of the connecting portion. Machine D15.

According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D14, the standing tip side of the connecting portion erected from one of the base member or the cover member is fastened to the other of the base member or the cover member with a metal screw. That is, when the base member and the cover member are connected and fixed by the connecting member, the metal screw is embedded inside the connecting portion, so that the rigidity of the connecting portion can be increased. As a result, when the joint portion is brought into contact with the end of the opening to regulate the displacement of the rack, the joint portion can be prevented from being damaged and the durability can be improved.

<Concept of the invention using the intermediate member 370 as an example>
One side member and the other side member arranged at predetermined intervals, and one side member and the other side member are erected between the one side member and the other side member, and one end side and the other end side are guided to the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A gaming machine provided with a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, characterized in that it includes an intermediate member interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member. The gaming machine E1.

Here, one side member and the other side member arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval, a displacement member erected between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. A gaming machine equipped with the above is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14602). According to this gaming machine, one side member is formed so as to be able to guide one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the other side member is formed so as to be able to guide the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. Then, the displacement member is displaced along the one-side member and the other-side member.

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the rigidity of the unit (a structure in which a displacement member is erected between one side member and the other side member) is low, and it is easy to cause damage, so that it is difficult to handle in the unit state. There was a problem that it was. Therefore, for example, in the transport process of transporting such a unit and the mounting process of attaching the unit to the mating member, it is necessary to handle the unit so that a large load is not applied to the unit, which causes deterioration of workability.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the intervening member interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member is provided, the entire unit can be shaped like a frame to improve its rigidity. Therefore, it can be easily handled in the unit state. Therefore, for example, in the transfer process and the mounting process, the permissible value of the load applied to the unit is relaxed, so that the workability can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine E1, a pair of racks connected to one end side and the other end side of the displacement member and arranged so as to be linearly movable on the one side member and the other side member, and teeth on the pair of racks, respectively. A pair of pinions that are rotatably arranged on the one-side member and the other-side member and to which the driving force of the driving means is applied, and a posture in which the rack is aligned in the longitudinal direction in the linear motion direction. A pair of rod-shaped bodies fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively, and the rack is connected to the rod-shaped body and the connecting portion is slid along the rod-shaped body. The featured gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the rod-shaped body is fixed to each of the one-side member and the other-side member, and the rack is connected to the rod-shaped body. It can be connected to the one-side member and the other-side member via the above, whereby a closed connecting loop between the displacement member and the one-side member and the other-side member and the interposition member can be formed. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinion arranged on the one-side member and the other-side member, and the displacement member and the one-side member and the other-side member are not separated from each other. Where connected, according to the gaming machine E2, the displacement member and the one-side member and the other-side member can be connected via a rack and a rod-like body (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the unit as a whole can be increased. Further, since the rod-shaped body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member is improved by that amount. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the unit as a whole.

When the rod-shaped body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, the rod-shaped body formed separately from the one-side member and the other-side member is attached to the one-side member and the other-side member and fixed ( For example, the purpose is not limited to the case of fastening and fixing (adhesive fixing), but also the case where a rod-shaped body is integrally formed with one side member and the other side member (for example, by resin molding by a molding die). Further, the rod-shaped body is preferably formed from a metal material. This is because when the one-side member and the other-side member are formed of the resin material, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member can be improved and the posture of the rack can be stabilized efficiently. Further, the driving force of the driving means may be applied to only one of the pair of racks, or may be applied to both of the pair of racks.

The game machine E1 includes a ball screw mechanism having a nut, a screw shaft, and a plurality of balls interposed between the nut and the spiral groove of the screw shaft, and the nut is on one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. The screw shafts are arranged on the one-side member and the other-side member, and the screw shaft of the ball screw mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the displacement member becomes a ball. The gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is displaced along the screw axis of the screw mechanism.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is connected to the one-side member and the other-side member via the ball screw mechanism, so that the displacement member and the one-side member and the other-side member are interposed. A closed connecting loop can be formed with the installation member. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinion arranged on the one-side member and the other-side member, and the displacement member and the one-side member and the other-side member are not separated from each other. According to the gaming machine E3, the displacement member and the one-side member and the other-side member can be connected via a ball screw mechanism (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the unit as a whole can be increased. Further, since the screw shaft is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member is improved by that amount. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the unit as a whole.

Further, in the rack and the pinion, the state of the displacement member tends to be unstable because the meshing state fluctuates greatly. On the other hand, in the ball screw structure, since a plurality of balls are interposed between the nut and the spiral groove of the screw shaft, the variation in the meshing state is extremely small. Therefore, as in the case of the gaming machine E2, for example, it is not necessary to separately provide the rod-shaped body. That is, for example, in the gaming machine E2, the first configuration (rack and pinion) for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member are improved, and the posture of the rack is stabilized. Two configurations with the second configuration (rod-shaped body) for achieving the conversion were formed by separate members, but according to the gaming machine E3, these two configurations are formed by one member (ball screw mechanism). can.

In a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is guided separately to the one side member and the other end side is guided to the other side member separately, a gap is likely to occur between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. It is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, not only the load of the driving means becomes excessive, but also the displacement member may be stopped. In this case, the structure of the gaming machine E3 that guides the displacement member by the ball screw mechanism is particularly effective in suppressing the deviation between the guidance by one side safely and the guidance by the other side member.

The gaming machine E2 or E3 is provided with a movable mechanism that is deformably formed, and the movable mechanism is interposed between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Game machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, a movable mechanism formed to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Since it is interposed in, there is a displacement between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member (that is, the displacement between the rack on the one-side member side and the rack on the other-side member side, or the one-side member. Even if there is a displacement between the nut on the side and the nut on the other side member), the displacement can be absorbed by the movable mechanism to stably displace the displacement member.

In particular, according to the gaming machine E4, a rod-shaped body or a screw shaft is arranged on one side member and the other side member, and the rack is connected to the rod-shaped body and the nut is connected to the screw shaft via a ball. Alternatively, the posture of the nut can be stabilized. As a result, when a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other side member of the displacement member, the movable mechanism itself can be easily deformed, and the displacement absorption function by the movable mechanism is surely exhibited. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the interposing member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in a displaceable state.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the interposing member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in a displaceable state. The relative positions of the side member and the other side member and the intermediate member can be adjusted. Therefore, when attaching the unit (a structure in which an intermediate member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member that guide the displacement member) to the attachment target, for example, the one-side member and the other-side member or the interposition are used. Even if one of the installation members is mounted and the other is displaced with respect to the mounting position, the other position can be adjusted to the mounting position for mounting. As a result, the workability of the mounting work can be improved.

In particular, when a movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place of the displacement member as in the game machine E4, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be used, so that the workability of the mounting work for mounting the unit to the mounting target is improved. Can be planned.

The displacement of the interposition member with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member includes, for example, rotation by a shaft support, linear or curved slide displacement by a guide groove, displacement in an arbitrary direction by loose fitting, or An example is a displacement in a direction in which elastic deformation of an elastic body due to elastic support is allowed.

In the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member is connected to the interposition member at one place, and the connection points are connected in a displaceable state by fastening with screws. The gaming machine E6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the interposition member are connected to one place, and the connecting points are fastened with screws. Since they are connected in a displaceable state, it is possible to allow the intermediate member to rotate relative to the one-side member or the other-side member with the screw as the rotation axis. Therefore, when mounting the unit (a structure in which an intermediate member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member that guide the displacement member) to the mounting target, the mounting position with respect to the mounting target can be adjusted. The workability of the mounting work can be improved.

Further, after the unit is attached to the attachment target, the unit can be fixed to the attachment target in a non-displaceable manner by the fastening force of the screws. That is, in the state before mounting the unit, the screw fastening is temporarily fixed, and the mounting position can be adjusted by the above-mentioned relative displacement, while the screw fastening is finally fixed (retightened) in the mounting work. , The unit can be firmly fixed to the mounting target.

As a structure for fixing the unit so that it cannot be displaced with respect to the mounting target, for example, a screw is formed as a tapping screw, fastened to a connecting portion between one side member or the other side member and an intermediate member, and around the tapping screw. An example is an example in which the unit is made into a unit so as to be relatively rotatable, and the tip of the tapping screw is fastened to the mounting target so that the entire body is fixed in a non-displaceable manner by the axial force of the tapping screw.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the interposing member are connected in a displaceable state by engagement.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the interposing member are connected in a displaceable state by engagement, so that the one-side member is displaceable. Alternatively, the unit (a structure in which the interposing member is interposed between the one-side member for guiding the displacement member and the other-side member) is attached to the attachment target by allowing the relative displacement of the interposing member with respect to the other-side member. While improving workability, it is possible to eliminate the need for separate parts such as screws for connecting the two, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The displaceable engagement includes a form in which the other shaft is rotatably inserted into one hole, a form in which the other shaft is slidably inserted into one groove, and a convex portion of the other in one concave portion. An example is a form in which the two are slidably fitted together.

In any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, and an urging means for applying an urging force to the target member are provided, and the urging means is provided. The gaming machine E8, characterized in that the urging force of the means is applied to the interposing member so that the interposing member is maintained in a state where the interposing member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member. ..

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the urging means disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in order to apply the urging force to the target member. The urging force of the urging means acts on the interposing member so that the interposing member is maintained between the one-side member and the other-side member. At least the intermediate member can be temporarily fixed to the other side member. Therefore, even when the interposition member is interposed in a displaceable state with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member, the unit (displacement member is guided by temporary fixing using the urging force of the urging means). It is possible to improve the work efficiency when attaching a structure in which an intermediate member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member) to the attachment target.

Further, the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging force of the target member but also as the fixing force of the intermediate member to the one side member and the other side member. Man-hours can be reduced.

In addition, as a form in which the urging force of the urging means acts on the interposing member, one end of the urging means is connected to the target member and the other end is connected to the interposing member to apply the urging force to the interposing member. In the first embodiment, when the target member is arranged on each of the one side member and the other side member, one end of the urging means is connected to one target member of both target members and the other target member. A second embodiment in which the other end of the urging means is connected and the intermediate portion between the one end and the other end of the urging means is brought into contact with the intermediate member to apply the urging force to the intermediate member is exemplified. NS.

In the first embodiment, the target member and the urging means may be arranged on only one of the one-side member and the other-side member, and the target member and the other-side member are provided on the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively. The urging means may be arranged, and the other ends of both urging means may be connected to the interposing member, respectively. In the former case, for example, in a structure in which the target member and the urging means are arranged only on one side member of the one side member and the other side member, one end side of the intermediate member is recessed in the one side member. Displaceably connected by engaging the convex portion, the other end side of the interposition member is rotatably connected to the other side member by a shaft support, and the urging force of the urging means in the direction in which the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion. An example is a form in which an urging force is applied to the interposing member so that the force is applied. According to this form, the interposition member is rotated around the shaft support on the other end side by the applied urging force, and the uneven engagement can be formed by this rotation. Therefore, the number of urging means arranged is one. Even in the case of only, it is possible to ensure the maintenance of engagement (a state in which the interposition member is interposed in the one-side member and the other-side member) only by the urging force.

Further, as the target member, a rack and a pinion are arranged on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is directly moved. A rack in a structure that displaces a displacement member is illustrated in the above.

In any of the gaming machines E5 to E8, when the interposition member is connected to at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member, it is characterized in that it is connected in a state where displacement in the three-dimensional direction is allowed. The gaming machine E9.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E5 to E8, when the interposing member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in a displaceable state, it is three-dimensional. Since they are connected in a state where displacement in the direction is allowed, the adjustment range of the relative positions of these one-side member and the other-side member and the interposition member can be expanded. Therefore, when attaching the unit (a structure in which an intermediate member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member that guide the displacement member) to the attachment target, for example, the one-side member, the other-side member, and the interposition. Even when the mounting surfaces of the installation members are non-parallel, the posture of each of these members can be adjusted with respect to the mounting surface. As a result, the workability of the mounting work can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, the base member to which the one-side member, the other-side member, and the interposition member are attached is provided, and at least one-side member and the other-side member can be displaced with respect to the base member. A gaming machine E10 characterized in that it is attached in a state.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, at least one side member and the other side member are attached to the base member in a displaceable state, so that the displacement member is displaced. Can be stabilized. That is, by attaching the one-side member and the other-side member to the base member in a displaceable state, the displacement (that is, rattling or wobbling) of the displacement member is utilized. It is possible to absorb the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, and as a result, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized.

The target to be attached in a displaceable state with respect to the base member is a case where the interposition member is displaceably connected to the one-side member and the other-side member, such as the gaming machines E5 to E9. The member may be only one side member and the other side member, and in addition, the intermediate member may be attached in a displaceable state. On the other hand, when the intermediate member is connected to the one-side member and the other-side member in a non-displaceable state (that is, when they are rigidly connected), the one-side member and the other-side member and the intermediate member are connected to each other. Both are attached in a displaceable state with respect to the base member.

Further, in the gaming machine E10, the gaming machine may be configured as follows. That is, a gaming machine comprising an elastic substrate formed of a rubber-like elastic body, wherein the elastic substrate is interposed between at least the one-side member and the other-side member and the base member.

According to such a gaming machine, since an elastic substrate is interposed between at least one side member and the other side member and the base member, the one side member and the other side member can be elastically supported by the base member. .. As a result, it is possible to easily absorb the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member of the displacement member by utilizing the displacement (that is, rattling or wobbling) of the one-side member and the other-side member. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine E10, the target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, the urging means for applying the urging force to the target member, and the intermediate portion of the urging member are in contact with each other. The gaming machine E11 is provided with a contact member, and the contact member is arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E10, a target member arranged on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, an urging means for imparting a urging force to the target member, and a urging means thereof. A contact member that comes into contact with the intermediate portion of the urging member is provided, and since the contact member is arranged on the base member, one of the one-side member and the other-side member (that is, the target member is arranged). When the object is displaced with respect to the base member (that is, rattling or wobbling occurs), the relative position of one of the one-side member and the other-side member and the contact member can be changed. .. Therefore, by changing the relative position, the contact position of the contact member with respect to the urging means can be changed so that the urging means is in a bent posture or the degree of bending of the urging means can be changed. The direction of the urging force applied to the target member from the force means can be changed. That is, the urging direction with respect to the target member can be actively controlled only by the mechanical structure according to the state of one of the one-side member and the other-side member (change in posture with respect to the base member).

As the target member, a rack and a pinion are arranged on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is directly moved. A rack in a structure that displaces a displacement member is illustrated in the above. Here, when one of the one-side member and the other-side member (where the rack is arranged) is displaced (rattling or wobbling) with respect to the base member, the posture of the displacement member changes due to the rattling. By doing so, the posture of the rack is changed, and the meshing state with the pinion becomes unstable. In this case, according to the gaming machine E11, as described above, the urging direction to the target member (rack) is actively controlled according to the state (change in posture) of one of the one-side member and the other-side member. Therefore, the urging direction of the urging means applied to the rack can be changed in the direction of stabilizing the meshing state with the pinion.

The game machine E2 includes a second pinion directly or indirectly connected to the pinion and a second rack meshed with the second pinion, and the second rack is driven by the driving means. As a result, the second pinion is rotated, and the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion accompanying the rotation of the second pinion to displace the displacement member, and the second rack is a crank mechanism. The gaming machine E12, which is driven by the driving means via the above.

Here, the game machine E12 has a two-stage rack structure in which the linear motion of the second rack is transmitted to the second pinion and the pinions and converted into a rotary motion, and then the rotation is transmitted from the pinion to the rack and converted into a linear motion. By adopting, the stroke amount of linear motion is secured. In such a two-stage rack structure, if a structure in which the second rack is driven by a driving means via the third pinion is adopted, the second rack has a tooth surface for the second pinion and a tooth surface for the third pinion. There is a problem that the longitudinal dimension of the second rack is increased by that amount.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the second rack is driven by the driving means via the crank mechanism, so that the tooth surface for the third pinion can be eliminated. Therefore, the longitudinal dimension of the second rack can be suppressed accordingly.

In the game machine E12, the crank mechanism has an eccentric pin protruding from the center of rotation at a position eccentric and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rotating body extending from the second rack to the rotating body. The gaming machine E13 is provided with a rack groove through which an eccentric pin is slidably inserted.

According to the game machine E13, in addition to the effect of the game machine E12, by rotating the rotating body by the driving force of the driving means, the eccentric pin located eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is placed in the rack groove of the second rack. It can be slid (sliding displacement) along the above, so that the second rack can be moved linearly.

The rack groove may be a concave groove recessed in the second rack, or may be an opening (through hole) formed in the second rack. Further, the extension direction of the rack groove is preferably set in a direction orthogonal to the linear motion direction of the second rack. It is possible to suppress the generation of components other than the linear motion direction of the second rack from the force component acting on the rack groove of the second rack from the eccentric pin of the rotating body, and to minimize the resistance, the second rack can be used. This is because it can be moved directly.

In the gaming machine E12, a protruding pin protruding from a surface of the rack facing the one-side member or the other-side member and a protruding pin extending from the one-side member or the other-side member and slidably inserted into the rack. With a guide groove to be
The crank mechanism has an eccentric pin protruding from the center of rotation at a position eccentric, and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentric pin of the rotating body is rotatably inserted into the second rack. With a shaft hole to be formed,
In the guide groove of the one side member or the other side member, the second rack is displaced as the rotating body of the crank mechanism is rotated, and the protruding pin of the second rack slides along the guide groove. The gaming machine E14 is characterized in that the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion.

According to the game machine E14, in addition to the effect of the game machine E12, an eccentric pin located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the rotating body is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole of the second rack, so that the driving force of the driving means is driven. When the rotating body is rotated by the above, the protruding pin of the second rack is slid along the guide groove extending to the one side member or the other side member as the rotating body is rotated, whereby the second rack is rotated. Can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion. Therefore, even if the posture of the rack is disturbed, it is easy to maintain the engagement between the second rack and the second pinion at a constant level, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

Further, the connection between the second rack and the crank mechanism (rotating body) is performed by rotatably inserting an eccentric pin into the shaft hole, that is, if a shaft hole having a circular cross section is formed in the second rack. At best, it is not necessary to extend the elongated hole-shaped groove for sliding (sliding displacement) the eccentric pin, so that the decrease in the rigidity of the second rack can be suppressed accordingly.

The fact that the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion means that the linear tooth surface of the second rack becomes the arc-shaped tooth surface of the second pinion in the axial view of the second pinion. It means an operation in which the second rack is rotated about the axis of the second pinion while maintaining a state of being in contact with the other (a state in which the straight line of the rack tooth surface is tangent to the arc of the pinion tooth surface).

Further, the guide groove may be a concave groove formed in the one side member or the other side member, or may be an opening (through hole) formed in the one side member or the other side member.

A gaming machine E15 comprising a detecting means for detecting a rotational position of the crank mechanism in any of the gaming machines E12 to E14.

According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, a detecting means for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism is provided, so that the rack is on one end side of the linear motion range based on the detection result. And it can detect that it has reached the other end side, that is, that the displacement member has reached the start end and the end end, respectively.

In this case, in the structure in which the detection means detects that the rack has reached one end and the other end of the linear motion range in order to detect that the displacement member has reached the start end and the end, respectively, the rack has a linear motion range. It is necessary to dispose the detection unit (sensor) at one end and the other end, respectively, but there is a problem that the wiring becomes long because these two positions are separated from each other. That is, the longer length not only increases the cost of the member, but also makes it difficult to route the wiring to avoid interference with other members, which deteriorates the degree of freedom in design and is involved by the movable member. The risk of disconnection increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the structure is such that the rotation position (phase) of the crank mechanism is detected by the detecting means, so that one end of the rotation range of the crank and others. Even if the detection units (sensors) are arranged at the ends, they can be arranged close to each other. Therefore, since the wiring can be shortened, not only the cost of the member can be reduced, but also the degree of freedom in design can be improved and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed.

The crank mechanism includes a rotating body having a crank pin protruding from the center of rotation at a position eccentric and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a concave portion through which the crank pin of the rotating body is slidably inserted. An example is a structure including a crank groove recessed in the second rack as a groove. In this case, the detection means detects the rotation position (phase) of the rotating body of the crank mechanism by the detection unit (sensor).

<Concept of the invention using the upper arm body 435 or the lower arm body 436 as an example>
It is provided with an effect member, a displacement means for displace the effect member between a retracted position and an effect position, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, and the effect member is placed in a predetermined position at the effect position. In a game machine formed so as to be displaceable, the displacement means includes a base member and an arm body in which one end side is rotatably connected to the base member and the effect member is displaceably arranged on the other end side. The arm body is rotated with respect to the base member with respect to one end side thereof, so that the effect member is displaced and the effect is provided. A game machine F1 characterized in that it is displaced from a position.

Here, the effect member, the displacement means for displace the effect member between the retracted position and the effect position, and the drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement means are provided, and the displacement means comprises a parallel link mechanism. , A gaming machine is known in which an effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at an effect position (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-28226).

That is, the parallel link mechanism includes a first arm and a second arm which are parallel to each other and have the same length and are interposed between the effect member and the base member, and the first arm and the second arm are parallel to each other. Is rotated with respect to the base member while maintaining. Therefore, the effect member can be displaced while maintaining a constant posture, and thus the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined position.

However, in a structure in which the displacement means uses a parallel link mechanism as in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the operating range of the effect member is narrow because interference between the first arm and the second arm occurs. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the displacement means includes a base member, an arm body in which one end side is rotatably connected to the base member and the effect member is displaceably arranged in the other end side. Since it is provided with a defining means for defining the posture of the effecting member with respect to the arm body, when the arm body is rotated with respect to the base member about one end side thereof, the posture of the effecting member is defined by the defining means. It can be displaced, and thus the effect member can be placed in a predetermined position at the effect position. In this case, since the arm body does not interfere with each other, the operating range of the effect member can be secured.

In the game machine F1, the displacement means includes a pair of the arm bodies, one end side of the pair of arm bodies is rotatably connected to the base member, and the effect member is rotatably connected to the other end side of the pair of arm bodies. The pair of arm bodies are rotatably connected to the base member in a state where teeth are formed on one end side thereof and the teeth are mutated with each other. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the effect members arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

According to the gaming machine F2, the displacement means includes a pair of arm bodies, and the pair of arm bodies are rotatably connected to the base member on one end side and displaceable on the other end side. Then, the pair of arm bodies are rotated with respect to the base member about one end side thereof, so that the effect members arranged on the other end side of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the pair of arm bodies have teeth formed on one end side thereof, and the base member is in a state where the teeth are meshed with each other. Since one end side is rotatably connected to the tooth, the rotation of the pair of arm bodies can be synchronized with each other. As a result, the effect members arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies can be brought into contact with each other with high accuracy at the effect position. Further, if one of the pair of arm bodies is rotated, the other is also driven and rotated, so that the pair of arm bodies (effect members) can be operated by one driving means.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, at the retracted position, the arm body is in a posture along the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, in the retracted position, the arm body is in a posture along the vertical direction, so that the weight of the effect member can be supported by the arm body. Therefore, the driving force of the driving means required to hold the effect member in the retracted position can be suppressed. In this way, it is impossible for the conventional product using the parallel link mechanism to position the arm body in the vertical direction at the retracted position (because the second arm interferes with the first arm). This is possible for the first time by the present invention. As a result, the energy consumption of the driving means can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the defining means includes a slide body that is slidably displaced on the base member, and the effect member is slidably displaced on the slide body. As the arm body is rotated about one end side thereof, the slide body is slidly displaced with respect to the base member, and the effect member is slidly displaced with respect to the slide body. The gaming machine F1 characterized in that the attitude of the effect member with respect to the body is defined.

According to the game machine F4, in any of the game machines F1 to F3, the defining means is provided with a slide body which is slidably displaceable on the base member, and the effect member is slidably displaceable on the slide body. By being provided and the arm body is rotated about one end side thereof, the slide body can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member and the effect member can be slid and displaced with respect to the slide body, and the effect member with respect to the arm body can be displaced. Can regulate the posture of. As a result, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture.

In the game machine F4, the base member is a guide shaft extending along the direction of slide displacement of the slide body, and a pair of guide shafts extending parallel to the guide shaft and facing each other at a predetermined interval. The slide body is provided with an facing wall portion, and the upper end side of the slide body is suspended and supported by a guide shaft of the base member so as to be slidable, and the lower end side is loosely fitted between a pair of facing wall portions of the base member. A game machine F5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, the resistance when the sliding body is slid and displaced with respect to the base member is suppressed, and the arm body is rotated around one end side thereof to produce the effect member. Can be smoothly displaced.

For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are arranged on a base member and one end and the other end of the slide body are guided to each of the pair of guide shafts so as to be slidable, there are two sliding parts and frictional resistance. Will increase. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, since the sliding portion can be set to one place, the frictional resistance when the sliding body slides and displaces can be suppressed. Further, according to the game machine F4, since the slide body is suspended and supported by the guide shaft of the base member, even if the slide body vibrates and the lower end side of the slide body comes into contact with the facing wall portion of the base member. , The slide body can be self-corrected to the posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the slide body can be returned to a state in which the lower end side thereof is loosely fitted between the pair of facing walls of the base member. Therefore, from this point as well, the frictional resistance when the slide body is slid and displaced can be reduced.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the displacement means includes a pair of arm bodies whose one end side is rotatably connected to the base member, and the effect member can be displaced to the other end side of the pair of arm bodies. The defining means connects the effect members arranged on the other end side of the pair of arm bodies, and at least one of the connecting portions with the effect members can be slidably displaced. A slide connecting member is provided, and as the arm body is rotated about one end side thereof, at least one of the connecting portions is slidably displaced, and the pair of effect members are displaced respectively. The gaming machine F6, wherein the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body is defined.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, the defining means connects the effect members arranged on the other end side of the pair of arm bodies and connects with the effect member. Since at least one of the connecting portions is provided with a slide connecting member that can be slidably displaced, at least one of the connecting portions is slidably displaced as the arm body is rotated about one end side thereof. , The pair of effect members can be displaced, and the posture of the effect members with respect to the arm body can be defined. As a result, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture.

Further, in the game machine F6, two sets (pair) of the arm body and the effect members displaceably arranged on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the effect members of each set are slide-connected members. Since the posture of the effecting member with respect to the arm body can be defined by connecting the effect member so that it can be slidably displaced by (regulating means), it is necessary to provide a hanging structure (sliding body) as in the case of the game machine F4 or F5, for example. No. That is, since the weight can be reduced by the amount that the slide body can be omitted, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the effect member only by the arm body even if the hanging structure is omitted.

In any of the game machines F1 to F6, two sets of the arm body and the effect member displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the sets are arranged facing each other. At the same time, at the exit position, the effect members are separated from each other by a predetermined interval, and the effect member in which the arm body is rotated about one end side thereof from the exit position is arranged at the effect position. Then, the effect members bring the contact surfaces into contact with each other, and a positioning convex portion is projected on one of the contact surfaces of the contact surfaces and the other contact surface. Is extended along the locus of the positioning convex portion when the arm body is rotated, and a positioning concave portion for receiving the positioning convex portion is recessed, and an engaging portion is formed in the positioning convex portion. At the same time, the gaming machine F7 is characterized in that an engaged portion that can be engaged with the engaging portion is formed in the positioning recess.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, each set is arranged facing each other, and at the retracted position, the effect members of each set are separated from each other at a predetermined interval. By rotating the arm body around one end side thereof, the effect members of each set are displaced in a direction close to each other, and in the effect members, the contact surfaces of the effect members of each group are brought into contact with each other. Can be made to.

In this case, a positioning convex portion is projected on one of the contact surfaces of the effect members, and the other contact surface is positioned when the arm body is rotated. Since the positioning recess extending along the locus of the convex portion and receiving the positioning convex portion is recessed, the positioning convex portion and the positioning concave portion can be engaged with each other at the effect position to position the effect members. .. That is, since the effect members of each set are close to each other by the locus of circular motion, the concave shape and the convex shape having the same dimensions cannot engage the convex shape with the concave shape. Since the arm body is extended along the locus of the positioning convex portion when it is rotated, the positioning convex portion can be accepted (engaged) with the positioning concave portion.

On the other hand, the positioning of the effecting members by engaging the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion is limited to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning concave portion. That is, in order to allow the positioning concave portion to accept the positioning convex portion even in the locus of the circular motion of the effect member, the positioning concave portion is extended along the locus of the positioning convex portion, so that the positioning concave portion extends in the extending direction. Therefore, the positioning protrusion cannot be engaged. Therefore, the effect members cannot be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and rattling occurs.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, an engaging portion is formed in the positioning convex portion, and an engaged portion that can be engaged with the engaging portion is formed in the positioning concave portion. At the position, the engaging portion and the engaged portion can be engaged with each other, and as a result, the effecting members can be positioned even in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and the occurrence of rattling can be suppressed. ..

Here, it is conceivable to omit the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion and provide only the engaging portion and the engaged portion to position the effect members. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to engage the engaged portion and the engaged portion due to the rattling or wobbling of the effect member due to the elastic deformation of the arm body or the dimensional tolerance. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F7, the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion are first engaged to position the effect members, and then the engaged portion and the engaged portion are engaged. The influence of rattling and wobbling of the above-mentioned effect member can be suppressed, and the engaged portion and the engaged portion can be reliably engaged.

In the game machine F7, one of the engaged portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which the ball is urged in the protruding direction by a spring, and the engaged portion and the engaged portion are formed. The other is the gaming machine F8, which is formed as a spherical recess that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which the ball is urged in the protruding direction by a spring. Since the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spherical recess that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism, the ball can be retracted as the effect members approach each other. As a result, the operation from the acceptance of the positioning convex portion to the positioning concave portion until the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged can be smoothly performed, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged. It is possible to smoothly disengage the engagement with the joint portion as the effect member is displaced to the retracted position.

It is preferable that the engaging portion as the ball plunger mechanism is provided in the positioning convex portion and the engaged portion as the concave portion is provided in the positioning concave portion. In this case, by pressing the ball of the ball plunger mechanism against the bottom surface of the positioning recess and retracting the ball, the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is recessed along the bottom surface of the positioning recess while achieving smooth movement. This is because it can be guided to the engaged portion), and the engagement of these balls (engaged portion) and the recess (engaged portion) can be reliably formed.

In the game machine F7, one of the engaged portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaged portion and the engaged portion is attracted by a magnetic force to the one magnet. The gaming machine F9, which is formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles of the above.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is one magnet. Since it is formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles in the direction of being attracted by the magnetic force, after the positioning convex portion is received in the positioning recess, they can be attracted to each other by the magnetic force. Even when there is a misalignment between the engaged portion and the engaged portion, the two can be accurately engaged (magnetized). As a result, it is possible to accurately position the effect members at the effect position.

In any of the game machines F1 to F9, the one-side member and the other-side member are arranged at predetermined intervals, and the one-side member and the other-side member are erected between the one-side member and the other-side member. A displacement member whose one end side and the other end side are guided and displaced, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member are provided, and the displacement member is rotatably arranged on the displacement member. A gaming machine F17 comprising a body, wherein the rotating body is rotated by a driving force transmitted from the effect member when the effect member is arranged at the effect position.

According to the gaming machine F17, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, one end side of the displacement member can be guided by one side member and the other end side of the displacement member can be guided by the other side member. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced along the one-side member and the other-side member by the driving force of the driving means. Further, the rotating body arranged on the displacement member can be rotated by the driving force transmitted from the effect member arranged at the effect position.

In this case, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is guided separately to the one side member and the other end side is guided to the other side member separately, a gap is likely to occur between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. , It was difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, not only the load of the driving means becomes excessive, but also the displacement member may be stopped.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F17, since the rotating body is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the effect member arranged at the effect position, a drive means for rotating the rotating body is arranged on the displacement member. It can be omitted to set. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the weight of the displacement member as a whole, and it is possible to prevent a deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member due to the weight reduction, and the displacement member is stably displaced. Can be made to. In addition, the size of the rotating body can be increased by the amount of weight reduction.

As a means for transmitting a driving force from the effect member arranged at the effect position to the rotating body in order to rotate the rotating body arranged on the displacement member, for example, a gear and an effect member provided on the rotating body are used. The gears provided in the above are meshed with each other by arranging the directing members at the directing positions, and the driving force is transmitted from the directing members to the rotating body through these gears. ), And a stator (fixer) is placed on the effect member, and a structure that transmits the driving force between the rotor and the stator (so-called DC motor structure), or the direction of the magnetic poles on the rotating body. A structure (so-called linear motor) in which magnets (fixed magnets) in which the two are alternately arranged are arranged along the circumferential direction, and electric magnets are arranged in the effect member, and the driving force is transmitted between the electric magnets and the fixed magnets. Structure) and the like are exemplified.

Further, in the gaming machine F17, the gaming machine may be configured as follows. That is, the roller member is provided on the effect member and formed so that the outer peripheral surface can be brought into contact with the rotating body, and the roller member having the outer peripheral surface brought into contact with the rotating body is rotated. , A game machine characterized in that the rotating body is rotated.

According to such a gaming machine, since the roller member is arranged on the effect member, the displacement member can be reduced in weight accordingly. In this case, for example, a structure in which a rotating body is rotated by engraving teeth (gears) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body and rotating a gear that can be meshed with the teeth is also conceivable. However, in this structure, when the effect member is brought close to the rotating body, if the tooth ridges of the gear and the tooth ridges of the rotating body collide with each other, the teeth may be damaged. When performing phasing (positioning the crest of one tooth in the valley of the other tooth), a sensor device is required, which increases the cost and complicates the control. On the other hand, according to this gaming machine, since the outer peripheral surface of the roller member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body, it is not necessary to perform phase matching between the roller member and the rotating body. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a sensor device, and the cost can be reduced accordingly. Moreover, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

<Concept of the invention using the urging spring 11366 as an example>
The base member, the target member displaceably arranged on the base member, one end is directly or indirectly connected to the target member, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the base member. A pair of the target members are displaceably arranged on the base member, and the urging means are arranged in a bent posture and among the pair of target members. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that one end is directly or indirectly connected to one target member, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the other target member of the pair of target members.

Here, the base member, the target member displaceably arranged on the base member, one end is directly or indirectly connected to the target member, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the base member. It is known that a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on a base member and the pair of target members are urged by different urging means. For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-169262). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving means, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the urging force of the urging means.

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since each target member is urged by a separate urging means, the magnitude of the urging force applied to each target member is large due to individual differences in the separate urging means. There was a problem that the variation occurred.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are attached to one and the other of the pair of target members. Since they are connected to each other, the urging force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform. That is, when the urging means of 2 is provided, the urging force applied to the pair of target members varies due to the variation in the characteristics of each urging means (dimensional tolerance, etc.). By applying the urging force to each of the pair of target members, it is possible to suppress the variation in the urging force applied to each target member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the pair of target members from fluctuating.

In this case, a pair of target members may be arranged on one base member, or the base member is divided and the pair of target members are arranged on different base members. It may be in the form of being.

Further, the gaming machine G1 is erected between the one-side member and the other-side member arranged at predetermined intervals, and the one-side member and the other-side member, and one end side and the other-side member of the one-side member and the other-side member. It is particularly effective to apply it to a gaming machine provided with a displacement member whose other end side is guided and displaced, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the gaming machine G1 to a configuration for guiding one end side of the displacement member and a configuration for guiding the other end side. In such a gaming machine, a gap is likely to occur between the guidance on one end side of the displacement member and the guidance on the other end side of the displacement member, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. By applying, the urging force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and the variation in displacement thereof can be suppressed, so that the guidance on one end side and the guidance on the other end side of the displacement member can be made uniform. .. As a result, the displacement member can be stably displaced by suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned displacement.

The gaming machine G1 includes a connecting member that is connected to the base member, and one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the urging means is formed. It is characterized in that the urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connecting member is pressed against the base member and the connection between the base member and the connecting member is maintained by being brought into contact with the connecting member. The gaming machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the intermediate portion of the urging means whose one end and the other end are connected to each of the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as a base. Since the urging force is applied so as to press against the member and maintain the connection between the base member and the connecting member, the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, by such temporary fixing, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when attaching these base members and connecting members to the attachment target. Further, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging force of the target member but also as the fixing force of the connecting member to the base member, a member for fixing the connecting member to the base member (for example). , Fastening screw) does not need to be prepared separately, and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and the assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the arm body 7641 and the roller receiving portion 7311e as an example>
One side member and the other side member arranged at predetermined intervals, and one side member and the other side member are erected between the one side member and the other side member, and one end side and the other end side are guided to the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member are provided, and the displacement member includes a rotating body rotatably arranged on the displacement member and a rotational driving force on the rotating body. The gaming machine H1 comprising a rotation driving means for imparting a displacement, and a displacement regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member.

Here, a game that produces an effect of rotating a rotating body is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231926). Further, a driving force is applied to the one-side member and the other-side member arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval, a long displacement member erected between the one-side member and the other-side member, and the displacement member. A gaming machine provided with a driving means for the displacement is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14602). For example, when the former rotating body is arranged on the latter displacement member, the position where the effect of the rotation of the rotating body is performed can be changed by the displacement of the displacement member.

However, in this case, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is guided to one side member and the other end side is separately guided to the other side member, the displacement member tends to rattle or wobble. Therefore, when rotating the rotating body, there is a problem that the rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is likely to be amplified due to the rotation of the rotating body, which causes wear or breakage of the moving portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the displacement regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member is provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling or wobbling of the displacement member when the rotating body is rotated. .. Therefore, even if the rotating body is rotated, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed, and as a result, wear or breakage of the moving portion can be suppressed.

Further, even when the other member is arranged at a position close to the rotating body in the effect position, the rotating body collides with the other member by suppressing the rattling and wobbling of the displacement member by the displacement regulating means. Can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the rotating body while locating the other member in close proximity to the rotating body.

It should be noted that four sets of the arm body and the effect members displaceably arranged on the other end side of the arm body are arranged, and at the effect position, the effect members of each group are brought into contact with each other to form a circle. A form may be adopted in which the ring shape is formed and the ring shape is arranged so as to surround the rotating body (the ring shape is arranged around the rotating body). According to the gaming machine H1, as described above, it is possible to suppress rattling and wobbling of the displacement member and prevent the rotating body from colliding with the effect member. That is, even in a form in which the ring shape (effect member) surrounds the rotating body, these collisions can be prevented, so that the two can be brought close to each other and a state in which the gap between the ring shape and the rotating body is smaller can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating only the rotating body while making the player recognize the ring shape and the rotating body as one circle as a whole, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine H1 is provided with a movable mechanism that is deformably formed, and the movable mechanism is interposed between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. H2.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, a movable mechanism formed so as to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, the displacement member tends to rattle or wobble due to the deformation of the movable mechanism. Therefore, when rotating the rotating body, the displacement member rattles or wobbles more than in the case where the movable mechanism is not provided, and the movable portion is likely to be worn or damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H2, the displacement of the displacement member can be regulated by the displacement regulating means, so that the displacement member rattles or wobbles even when the movable mechanism is arranged. It can be suppressed, and thus wear and breakage of moving parts and collision between the rotating body and the effect member can be suppressed.

It should be noted that it is impossible to bring the effect member close to the rotating body as described above to produce the effect because it is necessary to avoid collision with the rotating body. In particular, when a movable mechanism is provided, it is impossible. Since the displacement member rattles and wobbles excessively, it is impossible to rotate the rotating body itself. On the other hand, by adopting a structure that regulates the displacement of the displacement member by the displacement regulating means as in the present invention, it is possible for the first time to rotate the rotating body even when a movable mechanism is provided. It is a thing.

In the gaming machine H2, the movable mechanism is formed to include a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove, and the displacement regulating means is such that the guided portion of the movable mechanism is the guided groove. The gaming machine H3, characterized in that at least the displacement of the displacement member in the direction guided along the is regulated.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the displacement regulating means at least regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the guided portion of the movable mechanism is guided along the guide groove, so that the displacement is displaced. Factors that cause rattling or wobbling of members can be efficiently regulated. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the rattling and wobbling of the displacement member while reducing the force required for the displacement regulating means.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one of the deformable members and the other, which is divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism, and the displacement regulating means is an insertion member formed so as to be insertable into the gap. The gaming machine H4, wherein the insert body is inserted into the gap.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one of the deforming members divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism and the other, and is formed so as to be insertable in the gap. Since the insertion member is provided with the displacement regulating means and the insert body is inserted into the gap, the movable mechanism can be restrained so as not to be deformed (that is, the movable mechanism is fixed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling or wobbling of the displacement member when the rotating body is rotated, and it is possible to suppress wear or breakage of the moving portion or collision between the rotating body and other members.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of the arm body and the effect member displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. The displacement regulating means includes a rotation base that can support and is formed concentrically with the rotating body, and when the effecting member is arranged at the effecting position, the effecting member or arm body of each set of the effecting member or arm body is said. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement member is regulated by being brought into contact with the outer periphery of the rotation base.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of an arm body and an effect member displaceably arranged on the other end side of the arm body are provided. The displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the displacement member by bringing each set of the effect member or the arm body into contact with the outer periphery of the rotation base when the effect member is arranged at the effect position. The displacement can be regulated by contacting the outer periphery of the rotation base at a point. That is, since the outer circumference of the rotation base is held at a plurality of locations, displacement of the rotation base (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be suppressed in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body, and a plurality of effect members can be suppressed. The relative position of the rotating body with respect to the relative position can be positioned at a predetermined position.

In the gaming machine H5, the gaming machine may be configured as follows. That is, it includes a fixing member that is displaceably arranged on the effect member and is formed so as to be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base, and the fixing member is provided at least when the effect member is arranged at the effect position. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is displaced to a position where it abuts on the outer periphery of the rotation base, and at least when the effect member is disposed at a retracted position, it is displaced to the back surface side of the rotation base.

According to such a gaming machine, at least when the effect member is arranged at the effect position, the fixing member is displaced to a position where it abuts on the outer circumference of the rotation base, so that the displacement of the rotation base can be regulated. On the other hand, at least when the effect member is arranged in the retracted position, the fixing member is displaced to the back side of the rotation base, so that the fixing member is hidden behind the effect member (that is, visually recognized by the player from the front). Can be avoided).

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of the arm body and the effect member displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. It is provided with a rotating base that can be supported and formed concentrically with the rotating body, and a magnet is disposed on one of the effect member or arm body and the rotating base, and the other is made of magnet or iron. When the member is arranged and the displacement regulating means is arranged at the effect position, the displacement regulating means is said by the magnetic force applied between the effect member or arm body of each set and the rotation base. The gaming machine H6 characterized in that the displacement of the displacement member is regulated.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of an arm body and an effect member displaceably arranged on the other end side of the arm body are provided. The displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the displacement member by the magnetic force acting between each set of the effect member or the arm body and the rotation base when the effect member is arranged at the effect position. The displacement of the rotation base can be regulated by applying a magnetic force at the location. That is, since the magnetic force is applied to the rotation base from a plurality of directions, the displacement of the rotation base (that is, the rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be suppressed in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body, and the plurality of rotation bases can be suppressed. The relative position of the rotating body with respect to the effect member can be positioned at a predetermined position.

In the gaming machines H5 and H6, the contact positions where the effect members or arm bodies of each set are in contact with the outer periphery of the rotation base or the positions where the magnetic force is applied are at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (for example, in the case of three sets). Is preferably set at 120 ° intervals). In this case, there are four sets of the arm body and the effect members displaceably arranged on the other end side of the arm body, and the effect members or the arm bodies of each set are brought into contact with the outer periphery of the rotation base. It is preferable that the contact position or the position where the magnetic force is applied is equidistant in the circumferential direction (that is, 90 ° interval). Since the rotation base can be constrained from all sides by arranging the contact positions or the positions where the magnetic force acts so as to face each other (arranged so that the phases are 180 ° out of phase), the displacement (rattling or wobbling) can be set in any direction. However, if the relative position of the rotating body with respect to the effect member of each set is displaced, the rotation of the effect member with respect to the effect member is caused by the contact when the effect member of each set is arranged at the effect position. This is because the relative position of the body can be corrected (positioned). When the four sets of effect members form an annular shape at the effect position, centering can be performed so that the rotating body is positioned concentrically with respect to the annular shape, which is particularly effective.

Further, when magnets are arranged on both the effect member or the arm body and the rotation base, the direction of the magnetic poles of these magnets may be the direction in which the magnetic force is applied in the direction of attracting each other, or The direction may be such that the magnetic force acts in the direction of repelling each other.

In the gaming machine H5 or H6, when the effect members of the respective sets are arranged at the effect positions, the effect members bring the adjacent effect members into contact with each other, and one of the contact surfaces is in contact with each other. Is arranged with a magnet, and on the other contact surface, a magnet is arranged in the direction of a magnetic pole in a direction attracted by a magnetic force with respect to one magnet, or an iron member is arranged. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that when the effect member is arranged at the effect position, the contact surfaces of the effect member are magnetically bonded to each other.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H5 or H6, when each set of directing members is arranged at the directing position, each directing member hits adjacent directing members with each other's contact surfaces. Since they are brought into contact with each other and the contact surfaces are magnetized by using the magnetic force of the magnet, the effect members can be firmly bonded to each other. As a result, when the displacement defining means (effect member or arm body) comes into contact with the rotation base or exerts a magnetic force to regulate the displacement of the rotation base, the displacement defining means (effect member) itself may wobble. It is possible to suppress rattling and firmly hold the rotation base. As a result, the displacement of the rotation base member (that is, the rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be reliably suppressed, and the relative position of the rotating body with respect to the plurality of effect members can be reliably positioned at a predetermined position.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine K1 to play. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

Among the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine K2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted by a rack and a pinion to displace the displacement member (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-75550 (for example, FIG. 5). )). Since the rack and pinion can convert the rotary motion into a linear motion, they are useful as a mechanism for linearly displaces the displacement member by the driving force (rotary motion) of the motor.
However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the transmission of driving force.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 includes a driving means for generating a driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means. A rack and a pinion that transmit a driving force to the displacement member, and a guide means for guiding the rack are provided, and the guide means guides the rack in a displaceable state along the tooth surface of the pinion.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 includes a base member in which the rack and the pinion are arranged in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, and the guiding means is provided to the rack along the tooth surface of the rack. It includes an extended guided portion and a projecting portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided portion and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 includes a base member in which the rack and the pinion are arranged in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, and the guiding means faces the axis of the pinion with the rack interposed therebetween. A first regulating portion that protrudes from the base member and is capable of contacting the side surface of the rack at a position where the rack is formed, and a second regulating portion that is formed on the base member to regulate displacement of the rack in the width direction. The amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack allowed by the second regulating part is larger than the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack allowed between the first regulating part and the pinion. Is also enlarged.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the transmission of driving force can be stabilized.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, space efficiency can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the rigidity of the rack can be ensured.
<Code>
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
210 Rear case (base member)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310, 5310, 6310 Displacement members
311a protruding pin (guided part, part of movable mechanism)
311b Stopper surface (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
312 rotation base
313 rotating body (second displacement member)
314a slotted hole (guide groove, part of movable mechanism)
314b Stopper surface (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
314c slider holding part (part of connecting part)
315c slider holding part (part of connecting part)
315 1st rack (rack)
320L one side member
320R, 10320R, 13320R Other side member
331, 10331, 15331, 16331, 20331, 1331,22331 Back base (opposing member, base member, cover member)
331b rack shaft (part of guide means, part of linear motion control means, projecting part, second engaging part)
331c 1st opening (opening)
331d second opening (opening)
332,10332,22332 Intermediate base (base member, cover member)
341 drive motor (drive means)
351 1st pinion (pinion)
363 Crank gear (part of crank mechanism, rotating body, part of transmission means)
363a eccentric pin
364,20364,21364 2nd rack (rack, target member)
364a guide groove (part of guide means, guided part)
364b rack shaft (part of crank mechanism, guide groove)
365a 2nd pinion (pinion)
366, 11366 urging spring (urging means)
367 roller (rotary contact member, contact member)
367b Flange part (stop plate member)
370 interposition member (connecting member)
420 Back base (base member, cover member)
422a Upper rack shaft (connecting part, protruding part)
422b Lower rack shaft (connecting part, protruding part)
431 drive motor (drive means)
433 rack
433c Upper guide groove (opening, guided part)
433d Lower guide groove (opening, guided part)
435 Upper arm body (arm body)
436 Lower arm body (arm body)
440R1, 440R2 annular split body (part of regulatory means, third displacement member, directing member)
440L1,440L2 ring split body (part of regulatory means, third displacement member, effect member)
450 Posture regulation member (part of regulation means, slide body)
460 slide mechanism (part of base member)
462 guide rod (guide shaft)
480 cover body (cover member, base member)
491 Positioning convex part
491a Engagement recess (engaged or engaged)
492 positioning recess
492a Engagement convex part (engaged part or engaging part)
2610 Ball joint (part of movable mechanism)
2620 urging spring (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
3630, 5630 Rubber-like elastic body (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
7311e Roller receiving part (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
7641 Arm body (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
8641 base (part of regulatory means, part of displacement regulatory means)
8642 Insertion part (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
9652a-9652e magnet (part of urging means)
9651 Metal rod (part of urging means)
10331e Slit part (guidance means)
10367 roller (rotary contact part, displacement contact member, contact member)
10367b 1st flange part (stop plate member)
10367c 2nd flange part (stop plate member)
11661 Roller (displacement contact member, contact member)
13671 Telescopic actuator (contact member driving means)
15331g 1st Regulation Department (part of guidance means)
15331h 2nd Regulation Department (part of guidance means)
16681 recess (part of linear motion regulating means, first engaging part)
17493a recess (engaged or engaged)
17495 ball plunger mechanism
17495a ball part (engaged part or engaged part)
18453 holding part (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
1991 Magnet (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
1992 Metal plate (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
20331b rack shaft (protrusion)
20364a Guide groove (guided part)
20681 recess (first engaging part, part of linear motion regulating means)
20682 balls (part of linear motion regulation means)
21361 gear (part of transmission means)
21363 crank gear (part of transmission means)
22331b Rack shaft (part of connecting part)
22332u connecting protrusion (part of connecting part)
23700 ball screw mechanism
23710 nuts
23720 screw shaft
23730 balls
24740 rubber bush (anti-vibration substrate)
25763 Roller member
26771 Fixed claw (fixing member)
P guide rod (rod-shaped body)
S slider (part of the connecting part)
Scr screw (part of the connecting part)

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
100-104 Board box 420 Rear base (displacement means, base member)
435 Upper arm body (displacement means, arm body)
436 Lower arm body (displacement means, arm body)
440R1,17440R1,440R2,17440R2 Ring split body (directing member)
440L1,17440L1,440L2,17440L2 Ring split body (directing member)
450,18450 posture regulating member (displacement means, maintenance manual stage)
460 slide mechanism (base member)
480 cover body (base member)

Claims (2)

And directing member, a displacement means for displacing between that demonstration member of the first position and the second position, driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, in the gaming machine in which example Bei a,
Said displacement means, the center and the base member, and the arm body is pre-Symbol directing member one end rotatably connected is displaceably arranged on the other end to the base member, said one end of the arm body It is provided with a maintenance means which is disposed on the base member so as to be slidably displaceable by the rotation of the base member and maintains the posture of the effect member with respect to the base member .
The presentation member is slid displaced between the first position and the second position with the Suraido displacement of the maintaining means,
It said maintaining means, a game machine, wherein Rukoto is capable disposed backlash in the rotation axis direction of the arm body relative to the base member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images